207
Validation of Asset Pricing Models during Crisis and Non-Crisis Periods: A Comparative Analysis of Stock Markets in Sri Lanka and in the US By D. A. I. Dayaratne Registration No 2006/MPhil-PhD/EC/11 Date of Submission 21 st December 2010 Thesis submitted for the Degree of Doctor of Philosophy to The Department of Economics University of Colombo

Phd Thesis

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: Phd Thesis

Validation of Asset Pricing Models during Crisis and

Non-Crisis Periods: A Comparative Analysis of Stock

Markets in Sri Lanka and in the US

By

D. A. I. Dayaratne

Registration No 2006/MPhil-PhD/EC/11

Date of Submission 21st December 2010

Thesis submitted for the Degree of Doctor of Philosophy to

The Department of Economics

University of Colombo

Page 2: Phd Thesis

ii

Declaration

I certify that this thesis does not incorporate without acknowledgement any material

submitted for a degree or a diploma in any University. Also to the best of my

knowledge and belief it does not contain any material previously published or written

by another person except where due reference is made in the text.

Candidate: D. A. I. Dayaratne

Signature: Date: 21/12/2010

Approved for submission

Thesis Supervisor: Dr. Rajith W. D. Lakshman

Signature: Date: 21/12/2010

Page 3: Phd Thesis

iii

Dedicated to

My Mother and Father

Page 4: Phd Thesis

iv

Acknowledgements

Many people have helped and supported me throughout the preparation period of this

thesis. I would like to acknowledge my thesis supervisor, Dr. Rajith Lakshman, for

his guidance, valuable comments and his untiring effort to bring this thesis to the

current stage of completion. I also acknowledge with gratitude, Prof. Sunil

Chandrasiri, the coordinator of the program, for his invaluable advice, help and

guidance. I am also grateful to Prof. Athula Ranasinghe, the head of the Department

of Economics and Prof. Indralal De Silva, the Dean of the Faculty of Arts, University

of Colombo. Dr. Chandana Aluthge who helped me at the initial stage of the thesis

and all the staff members of the Department of Economics are also acknowledged. I

am also grateful to the National Centre for Advanced Studies in Humanities & Social

Sciences (NCAS) for funding my research.

My gratitude also goes to Dr. P. D. Nimal, University of Sri Jayewardenepura, who

provided valuable comments on my work in progress, particularly at the stage of

formation of variables of the research. The help of the director of Capitalstrust (pvt)

Ltd. Mr. Sarath Rajapaksa, to obtain weekly data series of CSE was also critical for

this work. My gratitude goes to Mr. K. M. M. I. Ratnayeka, who is currently reading

for his PhD at Utara University, for guiding me to many useful web resources. The

technical support of Ms. Wasana Chandraseekara and Ms. Dulani Rodrigo, both of

whom are graduates of the School of Computing, University of Colombo, is also

acknowledged. Mr. Malik Carder and Mr. Suanath in the Securities and Exchange

Commission (SEC) who helped me to gather information on Sri Lankan market must

be acknowledged. The valuable comments given by Prof. K. B. Palipane, Dean

Faculty of Applied Sciences of the Sabaragamuwa University of Sri Lanka and Dr.

Dissa Bandara, the Director Financial Services Academy during the several

discussions had with them must also be appreciated.

Last but not least I would like to thank my daughters, Sandamini and Dulmini, and

my wife Nirmala for enduring much hardship providing me the fullest support during

the long period of my study.

Page 5: Phd Thesis

v

List of Abbreviations

AMEX American Stock Exchange

APT Arbitrage Pricing Theory

ASPI All Share Price Index

BE/ME Book-To Market Ratio

CAPM Capital Asset Pricing Model

CPI Consumer Price Index

CRSP Center for Research in Security Prices

CSE Colombo Stock Exchange

DCF Direct Cash Flow

E/P Earning Price Ratio

FF3F Fama and French Three Factor Model

GDP Gross Domestic Product

HML High minus Low

ICAPM Inter temporal Capital Asset Pricing Model

ICSS Iterated Cumulative Sum of Squares

IMF International Monetary Fund

ME Market Equity

MKT Market Factor

MPI Milanka Price Index

MPT Modern Portfolio Theory

NASDAQ National Association of Securities Dealers Automated Quotations

System

NYSE New York Stock Exchange

RE Return

RF Risk Free Rate

RM Risk Premium

SMB Small minus Big

TRI Total Return Index

Page 6: Phd Thesis

vi

Abstract

This study investigates the validity of the Capital Asset Pricing Model (CAPM) and

Fama and French three factor model (FF3F) in predicting stock returns in the case of

the Sri Lankan and US stock markets during market crisis periods and non-crisis

periods. Past market crisis periods, defined as high volatility regimes, are identified

using the volatility break test of Inclan and Tiao (1994). Importantly, the periods

identified here were also identified as crisis periods in the previous work in finance.

This study investigates whether the fundamentals based and market based equity

market behavior as determined by the CAPM and the FF3F undergo changes as

markets are havocked by financial calamity. This study applies weekly data from both

markets for the empirical testing of the models. The methodology adopted for the

formation of portfolios is similar to the one used by Fama and French (1996). In

addition to the validation of the CAPM and the FF3F, this study further investigated

the existence of January effect for the same portfolios mentioned above in both

markets. Here the January effect is investigated for the same portfolios formed for the

purpose of testing the FF3F. It is one of the unique features of this study when

compared to other previous studies on January effect.

Findings suggest that in Sri Lankan market the CAPM does not work properly during

crisis and non-crisis periods, whereas it works well in the US market, both in crisis

and non-crisis periods. It is found that there are differences in the performance of the

FF3F during the identified crisis periods in the Sri Lankan market and the US market.

The findings on FF3F are mostly consistent with Fama and French (1996). In

particular, significant differences are found among SMB and HML during crisis and

non-crisis periods in both markets. The empirical evidence also confirms that the

FF3F model is sensitive to the January effect. Finally, the findings of this study may

be interpreted as a warning against using the model on long series of data punctuated

by random crisis periods. This will enable more specific generalization of findings for

crisis and non-crisis periods. The findings of this study are mostly consistent with

everal previous studies; for example, Wai and Gordon (2005) and Charitou and

Constantinidis (2004).

Page 7: Phd Thesis

vii

Table of Contents

Declaration ii

Acknowledgements iv

List of Abbreviations v

Abstract vi

Table of Contents vii

List of Tables xiv

List of Figures xvi

Chapter 1 Introduction 1

1.1 Introduction 1

1.2 Research Objectives and Questions 2

1.3 Distinguishing Characteristics and Contributions 4

1.4 Structure of the thesis 5

1.5 Limitations of the study 8

1.6 Summary and conclusion 9

Chapter 2 Theoretical and Empirical Literature on Asset Pricing 10

2.1 Introduction 10

2.2 The pre-CAPM Era 10

2.2.1 Value Investing and Intrinsic Value 11

2.2.2 Portfolio Selection and Modern Portfolio Theory 12

Page 8: Phd Thesis

viii

2.2.3 Liquidity Preference Model 14

2.2.4 Dividend Valuation Model 17

2.3 The CAPM 18

2.3.1 William F. Sharpe 19

2.3.2 John Lintner 22

2.3.3 Fisher Black 23

2.3.4 The CAPM as it stands today 26

2.3.5 Capital Market Line (CML) and the CAPM 28

2.4 Major issues of the model and empirical tests 30

2.4.1 The Asset Returns in CAPM 30

2.4.2 Econometric Problem of the Model 30

2.4.3 The CAPM and the Real World Market 31

2.4.4 Empirical studies of the CAPM and Different versions of CAPM 32

2.4.5 Empirical Contradiction of the CAPM 33

2.4.6 Roll‘s Critique of Tests of the CAPM 35

2.5 Post CAPM and Pre-FF3F Development of Literature 36

2.5.1 January effect 36

2.5.2 Size effect 39

2.5.3 Momentum effect 40

2.5.4 The Black, Jesnsen and Scholes Test (1972) 41

Page 9: Phd Thesis

ix

2.5.5 Fama–Macbeth Study (1974) 42

2.6 Emergence of Fama and French three factor model 43

2.6.1 Properties of the FF3F 44

2.6.2 Risk Proxies of the model 44

2.6.3 Empirical studies of the model. 45

2.6.4 CAPM and FF3F similarities and Differences 45

2.6.5 CAPM, FF3F and Multi-Risk Factor Models 46

2.7 Economic Crises and Stock Market Crashes 48

2.7.1 General overview of Economic Crisis and Stock Market Crashes 48

2.7.2 Information effect on Crisis 50

2.7.3 Historical Empirical Evidence of Market Crisis 51

2.7.4 Evidences on Volatility, Crisis and other Events 52

2.7.5 Main Causes of Volatility of Stock Returns 54

2.8 Patterns and gaps in the empirical literature 54

2.9 Summary and Conclusion 57

Chapter 3 Data and Methodology 59

3.1 Introduction 59

3.2 The Capital Assets Pricing Model (CAPM) 60

3.3 The Fama and French 3 Factor (FF3F) Model 61

3.4 Data preparation 62

Page 10: Phd Thesis

x

3.4.1 The generic description of portfolio creation 63

3.4.2 The formation of the FF3F portfolios: the Sri Lankan peculiarities 64

3.4.3 The creation or generation of data for additional risk factors 66

3.5 The Data 67

3.5.1 Sri Lankan stock market data 67

3.5.2 The US stock market data 71

3.5.3 Interlinks among the six portfolios and the market portfolio 74

3.6 Crisis identification and Inclan and Tiao (1994) 75

3.6.1 Iterated Cumulative sum of squares (ICSS) Algorithm 76

3.6.2 The ICSS and the periods of crisis in the CSE 78

3.6.3 ICSS and periods of crisis in the NYSE 82

3.6.4 Descriptive statistics for crisis and non-crisis periods 85

3.6.5 The correlation analysis of the crisis and non-crisis periods 88

3.7 Summary and Conclusion 91

Chapter 4 Test of Pricing Models and Anomalies in Colombo Stock Exchange 92

4.1 Introduction 92

4.2 Main Features of Emerging stock markets 93

4.3 Investing in Sri Lanka and the CSE 93

4.3.1 Sri Lanka: the economy in general 94

4.3.2 An overview of the Colombo Stock Exchange 96

Page 11: Phd Thesis

xi

4.3.3 Impact of Recent Global Crisis on the CSE 98

4.4 Test of the CAPM using the FF3F portfolios 99

4.5 Test Results for the FF3F 102

4.6 Test for Explanatory Power of SMB and HML 108

4.7 Market anomalies and the January Effect in the CSE 113

4.7.1 Preliminary evidence of January effect in the CSE 113

4.7.2 The CSE, January effect and the FF3F 115

4.8 Summary and Conclusion 118

Chapter 5 Testing of Asset Pricing Models for the US 119

5.1 Introduction 119

5.2 The US Economy 120

5.3 Tests for the CAPM and the FF3F 128

5.3.1 The CAPM test results in the US 128

5.3.2 Testing Results of Three Factor Model 130

5.4 Test for Explanatory Power of SMB and HML 134

5.5 Test Results of January effect US Market 138

5.5.1 Preliminary evidence of January effect US Market 138

5.5.2 Response of the FF3F to the January effects in the US 140

5.6 Summary and Conclusion 142

Chapter 6 A Comparative Analysis of the Impact of Market Anomalies in Sri

Lanka and in the US 143

Page 12: Phd Thesis

xii

6.1 Introduction 143

6.2 The current economic trends 144

6.2.1 Sri Lankan and the US economies: a recent snap shot 144

6.2.2 The stock markets: The key performance indicators 148

6.3 Risk and rewards comparison using summary statistics and pair-wise

correlations 150

6.4 Market wise comparison of major findings 152

6.4.1 Analysis of the Results of the CAPM in CSE and US 152

6.4.2 Comparison of the results of the FF3F 154

6.4.3 Comparison of explanatory power of SMB and HML 157

6.4.4 Differences and Similarities of January effect in both markets. 161

6.5 Summary of the findings 163

6.6 Conclusion 165

Chapter 7 Summary of the Findings and Conclusion 166

7.1 Introduction 166

7.2 Summary of key findings 166

7.3 Answers for research questions 167

7.4 Country specific findings in the Sri Lankan market 169

7.5 Country specific findings in the US Market 171

7.6 Contribution of this thesis 172

7.7 Policy implications of the findings 173

Page 13: Phd Thesis

xiii

7.8 Suggested areas for future research 175

7.9 Final remarks 176

References 177

Appendix A: The companies in the CSE 186

New Listing and De-Listing of Companies 1999-2008 186

Appendix B: Classification of Sectors of the CSE 188

Appendix C: VB codes 189

Codes for Matching BE and ME values for all companies 189

Page 14: Phd Thesis

xiv

List of Tables

Table 2.1: Characteristics of the Models ..................................................................... 25

Table 3.1: Descriptive Statistics for the weekly data from the CSE (1999-2008). ...... 70

Table 3.2: Descriptive Statistics for the US stock market (1985-2007) ...................... 73

Table 3.3: Pair-wise correlations for FF3F portfolios and the market ......................... 75

Table 3.4: Volatility breaks and crisis periods in the CSE .......................................... 81

Table 3.5: Volatility Breaks and Market Crashes- NYSE ........................................... 82

Table 3.6: Descriptive statistics for the CSE. .............................................................. 85

Table 3.7: Descriptive statistics for the US ................................................................. 87

Table 3.8: Pair-wise correlations of portfolios in the CSE .......................................... 89

Table 3.9: Pair-wise correlations of portfolios in the US ............................................ 90

Table 4.1: Test of CAPM in the CSE ........................................................................ 100

Table 4.2: The FF3F results for the CSE based on weekly data. ............................... 103

Table 4.3: A test of explanatory power of SMB and HML. ...................................... 110

Table 4.4: Mean excess returns for the CSE portfolios. ............................................ 114

Table 4.5: Testing of responses of FF3F to the January effect 1999 to 2008 in CSE 117

Table 5.1: Macro Variables of US Economy ............................................................ 121

Table 5.2: Financial Indicators of US Economy ........................................................ 123

Table 5.3: Test of CAPM in the US market ............................................................... 129

Table 5.4: The FF3F results for the US based on weekly data. ................................. 131

Page 15: Phd Thesis

xv

Table 5.5: A test of explanatory power of SMB and HML. ...................................... 136

Table 5.6: Percentage return of January & Non January 1964-2008. ........................ 139

Table 5.7: Testing of responses of FF3F to the January effect in US Market ........... 141

Table 6.1: Comparison of Key Economic Indicators. ................................................ 145

Table 6.2: Important Performance Indicators of Sri Lankan Market and US Market149

Table 6.3: Measuring Explanatory Power of SMB and HML ................................... 158

Table 6.4: January Seasonality of CSE and US ......................................................... 162

Table 6.5: Sensitivity of FF3F to January Effect ....................................................... 162

Table 6.6: Gravity of major findings ......................................................................... 164

Page 16: Phd Thesis

xvi

List of Figures

Figure 1.1: Overview of the thesis ................................................................................. 7

Figure 2.1: Efficient combination of E-V rule. ............................................................ 13

Figure 2.2: Portfolio Selection at Various Interest Rates ............................................ 15

Figure 2.3: The Investment Opportunity Curve. .......................................................... 21

Figure 2.4: Capital Market Line ................................................................................... 29

Figure 2.5: Analysis of empirical literature ................................................................. 56

Figure 3.1: Weekly time series plots for the CSE.. ...................................................... 69

Figure 3.2: Weekly time series plots for the US.. ........................................................ 72

Figure 3.3: The application of Inclan and Tao (1994) to the CSE. .............................. 80

Figure 3.4: The application of ICSS to the NYSE returns series................................. 84

Figure 4.1: Contribution by each sector to the economy of Sri Lanka. ....................... 94

Figure 4.2: ASPI and identified crisis periods for the CSE. ........................................ 98

Figure 5.1: Some economic and financial variables for the US. ............................... 124

Figure 5.2: Mean returns of the FF3F portfolios for the US Market (1964-2008). ... 140

Figure 6.1: Relationship between CAPM betas and excess return of portfolios. ...... 153

Figure 6.2: Multi factor beta of small and big portfolios.. ......................................... 156

Figure 6.3: Analysis of SMB Loading. ...................................................................... 159

Figure 6.4: Analysis of HML Loading. ..................................................................... 160

Page 17: Phd Thesis

1

Chapter 1

Introduction

1.1 Introduction

Over the years, empirical finance research has subjected the stock markets in

developed countries to rigorous examination. For example, in the US and in other

developed markets the cross-sectional relationship between stocks returns and

fundamental variables has been studied extensively. In contrast, only a limited volume

of work is available for developing or emerging stock markets. This is inadvertently

related to the fact that the developing/emerging segment of the global financial

architecture is minute in comparison to developed markets, particularly in the US

market. For example, stock markets in developing countries represented only 4.73

percent of the global market capitalization in 2005 (Standard and Poors, 2005).

Though this situation has led to a relative dearth of research on the function and

operation of stock markets in developing countries, the lessons that can be learnt from

studying them are nevertheless valuable. This thesis, therefore, examines a

particularly important model used in finance; namely the Capital Asset Pricing Model

(CAPM) and an important caveat thereto, the Fama and French Three Factor model

(FF3F), in the context of a rarely studied developing country, Sri Lanka.

The CAPM due to Sharpe (1964), Lintner (1965) and Black (1972) which is discussed

in more detail later, asserts that the return from a particular stock is primarily

determined by movement in the market return which led it to be identified as the

single factor model. As a model that was developed and tested in developed countries,

it can be challenging to adopt or even adapt the model for developing/emerging

markets. This difficulty can be at two levels. First, the model‘s assumptions may not

be valid for the developing markets. Second, the data availability issues could obstruct

its implementation. The current thesis circumvents these problems to provide a unique

example of an application and validation of the CAPM in developing countries. The

lessons learned here are reinforced by a rigorous comparative analysis involving the

Page 18: Phd Thesis

2

results from the application of the CAPM to the US. In fact, this comparative thread is

visible throughout this work.

A Large volume of scholarly articles that stemmed from previous work on the CAPM

is the literature on market anomalies which primarily disputes the single factor models

in favor of models with multiple factors. In fact, the present research places much

emphasis on the matter and painstakingly adopts the anomalies model due to Fama

and French (1992) for the case of Sri Lanka. The model is popularly dubbed as the

Fama and French three Factor (FF3F) model owing to the number of factors that is

proposed in the model. The new factors proposed in the model are argued to be more

important than the market factor flagged in the CAPM. As the use of the FF3F in

literature has largely excluded developing countries, the present implementation of

the model with Sri Lankan data stands to contribute non-trivial lessons to finance

literature. The application of the FF3F to Sri Lanka is also done, while carefully

drawing parallels with the US. Additionally, the work also purports to examine other

important CAPM anomalies, such as the January effects.

The rest of this introductory chapter is structured as follows. Section 1.2 examines in

detail the research questions that are raised and the approaches made to address these

questions. This is followed by a section which draws the attention of the reader to the

specific contributions of this thesis which distinguishes it from the rest of the

literature. Section 1.4 provides an overview of the thesis, while Section 1.5 flags some

of its limitations. This is followed by the summary of the chapter and some

conclusions.

1.2 Research Objectives and Questions

The main objective of this research is the application of asset pricing models to

developing country stock markets, represented by the Sri Lanka‘s Colombo Stock

Exchange (CSE). In order to achieve this, the present research undertakes to prepare

and organize the CSE data which takes much time and effort. For instance,

implementing a model such as FF3F demands that the stock price data be sorted and

Page 19: Phd Thesis

3

organized in various ways to construct dynamic portfolios (this process will be

examined in more detail in Chapter 3).

In addition to the main objective explained above, the study attempts to explore two

other important objectives that are identified as secondary objectives of this study.

First, is to understand whether the findings in Sri Lanka are peculiar to developing

countries. This objective will be achieved by focusing on the US for comparative

purposes. This comparison provides a new perspective of how these models operate in

developing countries. Second, in the backdrop of the recent financial crisis that

havocked the world, it was apparently important to ascertain whether the pricing

models behaved differently in crisis settings than in non-crisis settings. Investigation

of crisis sensitivity of asset pricing models is an important link which was missing in

the literature up to date. In view of the main and secondary objectives, the following

specific research questions will be addressed in this work.

1. The primarily concern of the study is to ascertain which of the two models

(CAPM and FF3F) is more powerful in explaining the differences of stock returns

in stock markets in Sri Lanka and the US?

2. Does the FF3F model outperform the CAPM?

3. Which one of the three factors (MKT, SMB and HML) modeled under FF3F is

more prominent in the CSE and in the US?

4. Can the CAPM be used as a valid model in capturing the differences of small and

big portfolios in CSE and NYSE?

5. Are there any significant differences in the behavior of FF3F in the months of

January for Sri Lanka and for the US?

6. Have the answers for the above questions 1 to 4 significantly changed during

market crisis periods?

Page 20: Phd Thesis

4

1.3 Distinguishing Characteristics and Contributions

In achieving the above objectives and answering the research questions the study

contributes to the literature on asset pricing in important ways. Firstly, the CAPM is

extended in several ways in this research. The most interesting aspect of this is the

testing of CAPM using the portfolios constructed for the FF3F methodology. This

portfolio wise testing of CAPM is also subjected to tests of crisis sensitivity which is

an important extension of the CAPM literature.

Secondly, the use of the FF3F in this work demonstrates some unique features. The

most prominent among these is the comparison of the behavior of the CAPM and the

FF3F in an emerging small market vis-à-vis a developed market. The test of the FF3F

for objectively identified crisis periods is also unique: the study examines the

behavior of the model during crisis and non-crisis periods within the sample used.

This constitutes an important measure of the impact of economic/financial crises on

asset pricing pattern of emerging and developed Markets. This provides a unique

opportunity to look into the modalities of how the CAPM and FF3F work in crisis

settings. No earlier research has investigated into this aspect before.

Thirdly, even though much work has been done on the US using FF3F, none of this

previous work used weekly data. The use of weekly data, instead of monthly, allows

the researchers to work with a larger number of observations. Though this does not

have obvious advantages for markets like the US which has centuries of historical

data, it makes a significant difference to markets like CSE with only few decades of

historical data to work with. In fact, had the investigator not used this approach the

work on Sri Lanka might not have been possible. Weekly data, obviously, captures

shorter terms movements of prices than monthly data, which therefore can bring out

the different aspects of investor behavior in a market.

Fourthly, the way crisis periods are identified in this work is unique in the literature.

Inclan and Tiao (1994) methodology used to identify volatility breaks in return series

such as stock returns is used for this purpose here. The thesis uses volatility

breakpoints in market return series indentified by using Inclan and Tiao (1994) to

Page 21: Phd Thesis

5

separate high and low volatile periods in the CSE and the US markets. The high

volatility in the series is taken to imply or reveal crisis periods and the low volatility

the non-crisis periods. This objective identification of crisis periods enhances the

validity of the findings of the present work.

1.4 Structure of the thesis

This thesis is structured in seven chapters. The links between these chapters and how

they contribute to one another are presented in this section using Figure 1.1. Chapter 1

outlines the objectives of the thesis. The contextual background provided in this

chapter presents an overview of the research questions that are discussed in detail in

subsequent chapters.

Chapter 2 is a review of the literature that is central to this work. This chapter reviews

key developments in empirical studies on the CAPM and the FF3F, as well as some of

theoretical contributions that support these developments. The chapter also looks at

the historical evolution of asset pricing models with a view to explaining how various

developments in the stock markets around the globe has affected this literature.

Chapter 3 is a central link in this work. It uses existing literature (Chapter 2) to

generate the methodological foundation for the key empirical works in Chapters 4 and

5. This centrality is brought out in Figure 1.1. The use of the CAPM and the FF3F in

this work is formalized in Chapter 3. This is followed by a data section which uses

much space to discuss in detail the formation of six portfolios for implementing the

FF3F. The portfolios for the Sri Lankan study rely on data inputs from the CSE and

the Central Bank of Sri Lanka in an unprocessed form. Converting this data into

portfolios is involves many procedures which are explained in detail in Chapter 3.

However, these steps are however not needed for the case of US, as the weekly

returns of the six portfolios needed to implement FF3F for the US is available free

from (http://mba.tuck.dartmouth.edu/pages/faculty/ken.french). This distinction

across the two sources of data is illustrated by the areas marked out using the

perforated line in Figure 1.1. While discussing the data issues, the chapter also

explains the use of Inclan and Tiao (1994) for the identification of market crisis

Page 22: Phd Thesis

6

periods in both Sri Lanka and the US. The chapter uses daily prices of market indices

for the CSE and the US in implementing Inclan and Tiao (1994).

Chapter 4 and Chapter 5 implement the empirical testing of the models for the case of

Sri Lanka and the US respectively. They use the same methodology and generate

similar outputs for the cases of Sri Lanka and the US. The contributions of these

chapters are highlighted in Figure 1.1.

The rest, apart from the data sections in Chapter 4 and in Chapter 5, are similar in

approach and implements CAPM and FF3F for Sri Lanka and the US respectively.

Apart from the validating the models, these chapters also deal with the measuring of

the sensitivity of FF3F to January months in both countries. Both chapters are based

on Chapter 3 as shown in Figure 1.1.

The comparison of the results of CSE and US is discussed in Chapter 6. The inputs to

this chapter come from Chapters 4 and 5. The comparisons made here is twofold: (1)

Comparison of CAPM, FF3F and sensitivity of the model (FF3F) to January seasonal

effect, and (2) Comparison of impact of financial crises on the models and their

predictions for both markets.

Chapter 7 summarizes the main findings of this work and offers some concluding

remarks. This also provides a discussion of how the objectives of the research have

been attained by the outcome of this work. An important contribution of the chapter is

the discussion of the policy implications of this thesis, especially for the Sri Lankan

case.

Page 23: Phd Thesis

7

Figure 1.1: Overview of the thesis

Ch 1Introduction

Ch 6Comparative analysis

of Sri Lanka vs. the US

Ch 5Validation of CAPM

and FF3F for the US.Test of crisis sensitivity.

January effect in the US.Test of power of FF3F variables.

Ch 4Validation of CAPM and

FF3F for Sri Lanka.Test of crisis sensitivity.

January effect in CSE.Test of power of FF3F variables.

Ch 3Methodology and data.

Data preparation and creation of the

six portfolios for the CSE.

Data description (Sri Lanka and US)

Identify Crises in Sri Lanka and the US using Inclan and Tiao (1994)

Ch 2Literature on asset pricing (including

CAPM and FF3F)Literature on financial crises

Ch 7Policy

implications and Conclusions

Six

po

rtfo

lio

s, m

ark

et

retu

rns

and

th

e

sele

ctio

n o

f cr

isis

p

erio

ds

for

Sri

Lan

ka

and

th

e U

S

Da

taW

eek

lyp

rice

so

f se

lect

ed

com

pan

ies

in t

he

CS

E,

mar

ket

ind

ex a

nd

91

day

TB

rat

e

An

nu

al C

apit

aliz

atio

n a

nd

BE

dat

a.

Da

taW

eekly

data fo

r the

six P

ortfo

lios an

d th

e U

S m

arket in

dex

Page 24: Phd Thesis

8

1.5 Limitations of the study

Finance research in developing countries, particularly those involving stock markets,

is challenging due to the limited availability of data. By overcoming these challenges

the present study contributes to the literature existing on many fronts. However, it

does not mean that all such issues are solved here. In particular, this research in its

current form has some limitation that needs to be identified and appreciated. This

exercise will place the findings of this work in proper perspective and make them

more useful.

The main limitation of the study still involves data, particularly in the case of Sri

Lanka. An unavoidable issue in this regard is the unavailability of historical data. The

lack of information from the CSE is due to the relatively young existence of the

market. Also the automated trading is a relatively recent phenomenon which implies

that data from earlier periods are not available in digital form.

Another important limitation that could not be avoided in the present study, but which

could easily be rectified in future work, is that the 2008 crisis has not been covered in

it. As the data collection for this study predates the crisis, it is not possible to bring in

a meaningful discussion of the impact of the present crisis on Sri Lanka or the US.

This was primarily hampered by the colossal amount of work that needs to be done in

order to prepare data for the Sri Lankan study.

In addition to the above limitations, the study also faced other limitations inherent in

any study of stock markets in developing countries. These include issues of

new-listing/de-listing of companies, and the issue of thin trading.

Page 25: Phd Thesis

9

1.6 Summary and conclusion

This chapter explores the main objectives of this study and examines how they are to

be achieved. Six research questions that are identified alerts the reader to the various

sub focuses of the research. In addition, this chapter usefully identifies academic and

empirical contributions of the thesis. The outline of the thesis was used to identify

where in the thesis these contributions arise. Finally, some limitations that restricted

the scope of the thesis, particularly data limitations, have been outlined.

Page 26: Phd Thesis

10

Chapter 2

Theoretical and Empirical Literature on Asset Pricing

2.1 Introduction

This chapter reviews the literature on asset pricing, with a specific focus on

theoretical and empirical work that highlights the literature on the CAPM and the

FF3F—the focus of this work. This focus demands, however, that the literature

review focus on the literature that provides the backdrop to the works on the CAPM

and its anomalies. The chapter is organized around the CAPM in a specific and

perhaps obvious chronological order: it starts by examining precursors to the CAPM,

followed by the CAPM itself and the aftermath of the CAPM. In covering this ground

the chapter is able to identify a gap in the literature which is to be filled by the present

work.

The chapter gives an overview of the initial stages of the development of this

literature in Section 2.2 focusing on pre-CAPM literature. This is followed by Section

2.3 which deals with the emergence of important literature of the CAPM. Here the

discussion is mainly focused on the evolution of the CAPM to date placing, with

much emphasis on the practical application of the model. Section 2.4 discusses the

CAPM anomalies with special reference to the January effect. The theoretical

background and emergence of the FF3F is covered in Section 2.5. Section 2.6

establishes the impact of the financial crisis on asset pricing models and major market

crises experienced in the history of capital markets in the world. The contribution of

this study to the body of knowledge of this area is summarized in Section 2.7. The

final section concludes the chapter.

2.2 The pre-CAPM Era

This section looks at the literature that led to the development, later known as the

asset pricing literature spearheaded by the CAPM. As such much emphasis is put on

the evolution of asset pricing concept. Even though asset pricing per se was rarely

examined in the literature prior to the CAPM, there were some key pre-CAPM

Page 27: Phd Thesis

11

contributions that had much impact on the latter development of asset pricing theory

in finance.

2.2.1 Value Investing and Intrinsic Value

Historically, the Wall Street crash of 1929 inspired investors and other professionals

to look for better practices of investment which were conservative and safe. This

interest was also fueled by the abandonment of the gold standard in the early 1930s

and the resulting depreciation of many currencies. The concept of value investing

introduced by Graham and Dodd (1934) was an important contribution to the

literature during this time. The currency of the concept highlights the continued used

of it even today (the sixth, and the latest edition of this work was published in 2008).

The concept of value investing contends that in order to make profits in the stock

markets, the investors should buy stocks at a price lower than their intrinsic value.

Graham and Dodd (1940 : 20-21) agreed that:

an elusive concept and in general terms it is understood to be that value

which is justified by the facts, e.g., the assets, earnings, dividends,

representative of what may be expected in the future.

With its emphasis on future earnings, the concept of intrinsic value alludes to

something beyond mere economic value to an investor. It also emphasizes the

importance of the adequacy of the value of investment to protect the investor. This is

further emphasized by the concept of ―safety of principal‖ also defined by Graham

and Dodd (1940: 63) as:

An investment operation is one which upon through analysis premises

safety of principal and a satisfactory return. Operations not meeting

these requirements are speculative.

This concept gained due recognition from the practitioners and other researchers

during 1930s and 1940s. This empirical concern spearheaded by the work of Graham

and Dodd led the way to formalizing the theoretical relationships between a safety of

an investment and its returns. This concern also sprouted other works that looked at

Page 28: Phd Thesis

12

ways to increase the ―safety of principal‖. Hayes (1950), for instance, examines issues

involved in appraisal of safety of investment in common stocks and suggests

diversification of investments as a method of obtaining safety.

2.2.2 Portfolio Selection and Modern Portfolio Theory

As noted above, the importance of diversification in view of conservative and safe

investing was getting established during the 1950s. The helm of this movement is

undoubtedly the advent of the Modern Portfolio Theory (MPT) due to the 1990 Noble

Prize winner Harry Markowitz. Markowitz (1952) proposing "expected returns-

variance of returns" rule as the best, and also the safest rule of investment. Markowitz

(1952: 82) states his rule as follows:

The E-V rule states that the investor would (or should) want to select

one of those portfolios which give rise to the (E, V) combinations

indicated as efficient in the figure; i.e., those with minimum V for

given E or more and maximum E for given V or less.

The figure in the above quote is reproduced in Figure 2.1. The figure presents the

attainable combinations and efficient combinations (the thick arc) under the E-V rule.

The rational investor should invest in such a manner that he/she achieves any efficient

E, V combination. The figure also illustrates that the efficient combinations are a

subset of the attainable E, V combinations. Markowitz goes on to prove that an

investor, using stocks of a given set of companies, can easily position him/her self

anywhere in the attainable set of E, V combinations. Perhaps within the purview of

this thesis, the most significant contribution of the Markowitz‘s work is this.

Page 29: Phd Thesis

13

Figure 2.1: Efficient combination of E-V rule.

attainable E ,Vcombinations

efficient E,Vcombinations

V

E

Source: Fig 1 of Markowitz (1952)

To explain the above proposition Markowitz (1952: 81) derived the expected value

(E) and the expected variance (V) of a portfolio of N number of stocks (i) and stock

return (ui) as follows:

N

i

iiuXE1

(2.1)

ji

N

i

N

ji

ji XXσV

1

(2.2)

where ji is the covariance between returns of stock i and stock j, Xi and Xj are the

weights of each stock within the portfolio (i=j=1,2,…,N). Equation 2.2 captures an

important result which revolutionized the asset pricing literature. Namely, the

covariance between stocks is critical for the variance of the portfolio. Markowitz

(1952: 89) states:

Page 30: Phd Thesis

14

In trying to make variance small it is not enough to invest in many

securities. It is necessary to avoid investing in securities with high co-

variances among themselves.

This work was pivotal in establishing the significance of the co-movement of stock

prices as a component of risk. In later developments many authors build upon this to

establish the concept of systematic risk which is an important piece of historical

evolution that is being mapped here.1

2.2.3 Liquidity Preference Model

James Tobin (1958) in his seminal work used traits of MPT and the theory of liquidity

preference developed by Keynes (1937). He used a micro model to examine the

behavior of an investor when he/she maintains a portfolio of assets. As Tobin‘s work

has advanced the understanding of liquidity preference behavior it also has a non

trivial impact on the literature on asset pricing.2

It is interesting that the main idea of Markowitz‘s (1952), which was dubbed the E-V

rule in Section 2.2.2, is used by Tobin (1958) in a different context. Both use the idea

that a portfolio can potentially have many E-V combinations. The only difference is

where as Markowitz uses a portfolio of common stocks. Tobin uses a portfolio of cash

and bonds.3

1 see for example Hirshleifer Hirshleifer, J. (1961). "The Bayesian Approach to Statistical Decision An

Exposition." Journal of Business 34(4): 471-489.

. 2 A Google Scholar search revealed that Tobin (1958) has been cited in 2910 studies at the time of

writing. 3 Tobin called these consols.

Page 31: Phd Thesis

15

Figure 2.2: Portfolio Selection at Various Interest Rates and Before and After Taxation.

0 1

Source : Adapted from Figure 1 of Tobin (1958)

T1

T2

C1

C2

B

A2(r1)

A2(r1)

A1(r1)

A1(r1)

A11

0

σRσg

I1

I2

Figure 2.2, which is adapted from Tobin (1958: 73), graphically presents the decision

making process of an investor within Tobin‘s liquidity preference model. In the upper

half of Figure 2.2 the vertical axes represents expected return and the horizontal axis

risk. There the investor decides how to construct a portfolio consisting of two

components, cash and consols. The decision of the investor involves the proportion

Page 32: Phd Thesis

16

of his/her investment that goes into cash A1 and so the proportion that would go into

consols is (A2 = 1 - A1); . Tobin assumed that A1 and A2 do not depend on absolute size

of the initial investment balance in dollars. The return on this portfolio of cash and

consols, R, is:

)(2 grAR 10 2 A (2.3)

where r is the interest rate from consols and g is the capital gain or loss from investing

in consols. The variable g is assumed to have an expected value of 0 in which case the

expected value of R can be written as:

rARE R 2)( (2.4)

As shown in Figure 2.2 standard deviation of R depends on the standard deviation of

g, σg, and on the amount invested in the consols:

gR A 2 (2.5)

The conditions in equation 2.3 indicate that the proportion the investor holds in

consols A2 determines both his expected return µR and his σR. The terms in which the

investor can obtain greater expected return at the expense of assuming more risk can

be derived from (2.4) and (2.5):

R

g

R

r

gR 0 (2.6)

This opportunity locus is shown as 0C1 in the figure. The slope of this locus is g

r

1 .

For a higher r2 the opportunity locus is shown as 0C2. Similarly, cash holding (A1) can

be read on the right-hand vertical axis. The investor is indifferent between all pairs

(µR, σR) that lie on a curve as shown in I1. Points on I2 are preferred to those on I1, for

given risk an investor always prefers a greater to a small expectation of return. These

indifference curves are similar in spirit to the efficient E-V combinations of

Markowitz (1952) shown in Figure 2.1. Tobin (1958) showed that the efficient E-V

Page 33: Phd Thesis

17

combinations for a portfolio of cash and consols are in fact sensitive to the interest

rate.

The work of Tobin (1958) on liquidity preference has been later improved by several

others Feldstein (1969) and Chang, Hamberg and Hirata (1983). These, however, do

not in anyway take away Tobin‘s important contributions to the theory of asset

pricing.

2.2.4 Dividend Valuation Model

The Dividend Valuation Model is also known as the Gordon Model after the author of

Gordon (1959) who proposed the model. The model attempts to build up on the

concept of intrinsic value of Graham and Dodd (1934) discussed in Subsection 2.2.1

in p.11. Gordon proposes an empirical model to capture the intrinsic value of a stock

using its future dividends. Though Graham and Dodd (1934) alluded to a link between

dividend and earnings, it was Gordon (1959) who first empirically tested it. For

instance Gordon (1958: 99) states:

Graham and Dodd go so far as to state that stock prices should bear a

specified relation to earnings and dividends, but they neither present

nor cite data to support the generalization.

Gordon (1959) effectively uses cross-sectional stock prices to build an elementary

theory of variation of stock prices in relation to dividends and earnings. The empirical

literature on asset pricing is proliferated with this important application of statistical

technique. Gordon (1959) observed that stockholders are interested in both dividends

and income per share and derived a model to prove this phenomenon:

YDP 210 (2.7)

where P = the year end price, D = the year‘s dividend, Y = the year‘s income. The

coefficients 1 and 2 are the values that the market places on dividends and

earnings respectively. Gordon did not restrict and went on to test the model

empirically in a real market situation.

Page 34: Phd Thesis

18

Two hypotheses were developed by the investigator in the model. The first was the

dividend hypothesis which assumed that the investor buys dividend when he buys

shares. In implementing this hypothesis it must be recognized that the stockholder is

interested in the entire sequence of dividend payments that he may expect and not

merely the current value. The other hypothesis assumes that the investor buys income

for shares when he acquires a share of stock. More specifically, the value of equity

can be written as the present value of expected dividends during the non-stable

growth phase and the present value of price at the end of the high growth phase are

usually computed using equation 2.3.

Subsequently, in order to simplify the complexity of the Gordon model, the

researchers found some variants to the original model. For instance, Chen (1967)

examined the validity of the Gordon‘s model in valuing stocks in levered firms that

are highly regulated. Furthermore, recently the H- Model was developed by Fuller

and Hsia (1984). This model avoids the problems associated with the growth rate

dropping precipitously from the high growth to the stable growth phase, but it does so

at a cost. First, the decline in the growth rate is expected to follow the strict structure

laid out in the model and it drops in linear increments each year based upon the initial

growth rate, the stable growth rate and the length of the extraordinary growth period.

While small deviations from this assumption do not affect the value significantly,

large deviations can cause problems. Second, the assumption that the payout ratio is

constant through both phases of growth exposes the analyst to an inconsistency

because as the growth rates declines, the payout ratio usually increases. H-Model

assumes that firm‘s growth rate declines in a linear passion from an above normal rate

to a normal long term rate. The H-Model is more practical than the general discount

model.

2.3 The CAPM

The CAPM is considered the backbone of modern price theory for financial markets.

The CAPM basically explains the relationship between average stock return and

market portfolio and is widely used in empirical analysis of securities. Moreover, the

model is applied extensively by practitioners and has therefore become an important

Page 35: Phd Thesis

19

basis for decision-making in different areas in corporate finance. In the present

section, the CAPM and its arguments are introduced in some detail using material

from the work of Sharpe (1964), Lintner (1965), and Black (1972). This section traces

the evolution of asset pricing theory through the prominent works in the pre-CAPM

literature (some of these were discussed in Section 2.2) up to the level of the CAPM.

2.3.1 William F. Sharpe

William Sharpe won the 1990 Nobel Prize in economics for the contribution of the

CAPM to financial economics in the reputed piece Sharpe (1964). Of course the

model was not named the CAPM till Fama (1968: 34):

Fortunately, it is shown that the measure of the risk of an individual

asset and the equilibrium relationship between risk and expected return

derived from the capital asset pricing model will be essentially the

same whether or not it is assumed that such riskless borrowing-lending

opportunities exist.

Sharpe (1964), heavily influenced by Markowitz (1952) as discussed in Section 2.2.2,

attempts to offer a micro analysis to market analysis of price formation for financial

assets. The basis of the CAPM is that an individual investor can choose exposure to

risk through a combination of lending and borrowing and a suitably composed

(optimal) portfolio of risky securities. Sharpe specifically stated that the composition

of this optimal risk portfolio depends on the investor's assessment of the future

prospects of different securities, and not on the investors' own attitudes towards risk.

The latter is reflected solely in the choice of a combination of a risk portfolio and risk-

free investment (for instance treasury bills) or borrowing. In the case of an investor

who does not have any special information, i.e., better information than other

investors, there is no reason to hold a different portfolio of shares than other investors,

for example a so-called market portfolio of shares.

Sharpe (1964) assumed that an individual views the outcome of an investment in

probabilistic terms that is in terms of probability distribution. In assessing the

desirability of an investment he recommended two parameters; namely, expected

Page 36: Phd Thesis

20

value and standard deviation. Sharpe (1964) stated that the expected value and

standard deviation can be represented by a total utility function given below:

),( WWEfU (2.8)

Where EW indicates expected future wealth and σw the predicted standard deviation of

the possible divergence of actual future wealth from EW. To simplify the presentation,

Sharpe (1964) assumed that investor has decided to commit a given amount (W1) of

his present wealth to investment. Letting (Wt ) be his/her terminal wealth and R the

rate of return on the investment:

1

1

W

WWR t

(2.9)

11 WRWWt (2.10)

This relationship makes it possible to express the investor‘s utility in terms of R, since

terminal wealth is directly related to the rate of return.

Figure 2.3 summarizes investor preferences in a family of indifference curves. Such

indifference curves can also be derived by assuming that the investor wishes to

maximize expected utility and that his/her utility can be represented by quadratic

function of R with decreasing marginal utility. As previously explained in Subsections

2.2.2 and 2.2.3 respectively, both Markowitz and Tobin present such a derivation.

Page 37: Phd Thesis

21

Figure 2.3: The Investment Opportunity Curve.

.C

σR

II

III

.

X

. D

ER

Source : Adopted from Figure 2 of Sharpe (1964)

.

I

.B

F

Z

.

.

The model of investor behavior considers the investor as choosing from a set of

investment opportunities that as maximizes his/her utility. Every investment plan

available to the investor may be represented by a point in a point in the ER, σR plane. If

all such plans involve some risk, the area composed of such points will have an

appearance similar to that shown in Figure 2.3. The fundamental concept behind the

selection of portfolios is similarly to what Markowitz stated. As described in

Subsection 2.2.2 Markowitz introduced E-V combination instead of ER, σR plane for

the selection of optimal portfolios, as both concepts fundamentally explains the same

procedure.

The investor will choose from among all possible plans the one placing him on the

indifference curve representing the highest level of utility, point F in Figure 2.3. The

decision can be made in two stages: first find the set of efficient investment plans and

second choose one from among this set. A plan is said to be efficient if there is no

alternative with either (1) the same ER, and a lower σR , (2) the same σR and a higher

Page 38: Phd Thesis

22

ER, or (3) a higher ER, and a lower σR. Thus, investment Z is inefficient since

investments B, C and D dominate it. The only plans which would be chosen must lie

along the lower right-hand boundary (AFBDCX) which is the investment opportunity

curve for an individual investor.

2.3.2 John Lintner

In the late 1960s several extensions to the initial work of Sharpe appeared in the

historical literature of finance. As an immediate response Lintner (1965) attempted to

give an alternative and transparent proof to the separation theorem of Fisher (1930)

which is also extended to Tobin (discussed in the previous section) in the light of

Sharpe (1964) discussed in section 2.2.3 of this chapter. The separation theorem is

defined as ―an investor makes choices on the basis of net present value of the

projected returns and not on his level of risk tolerance‖. 4

Following these extensions of Tobin‘s classic work, Lintner (1965) concentrated on

the set of risk assets held in risk averters‘ portfolios which gave identical approach to

the initial work of Sharpe. It is important to emphasize that the Sharpe and Lintner

asset pricing models, like the Markowitz and Tobin portfolio models, present one-

period analyses. The one-period return defined in this way is just a linear

transformation of the units in which terminal wealth is measured; an investor's utility

function can be defined in terms of one- period return just as well as in terms of

terminal wealth. Note that the one-period return involves no compounding; it is just

the ratio of the change in terminal wealth to initial wealth, even though the horizon

period may be very long.

Lintner considers an extension of the asset pricing model to the case where investors

disagree on the expected returns and standard deviations provided by portfolios. The

results are essentially the same as those derived under the assumption of homogenous

expectations.

4 www.investorwords.com/7441/portfolio. (last accessed 09/06/2011)

Page 39: Phd Thesis

23

Recall that as previously mentioned, the emergence of CAPM is a collective

contribution of several Scholars. It is interesting to note that Lintner (1965) extended

the original version of Sharpe‘s work in several ways. However, the work of Sharpe

(1964) and work of Lintner (1965) share some similarities. Both have paid attention to

the selection of optimal portfolios for an individual investor. Therefore, it is observed

that the first section of the Lintner‘s paper parallels with first half of Sharpe‘s (1964).

Most of the models that appeared in both papers were also similar. Lintner (1965)

further introduced the option of short selling to the investor which was not addressed

by Sharpe in his deriving of the models.

Although short sales are excluded by assumption in most of the

writings on portfolio optimization, this restrictive assumption is

arbitrary for some purposes at least, and we therefore broaden the

analysis in this paper to include short sales whenever they are

permitted. (Lintner 1965 : 19 ).

He widened his work under two conditions; first, the optimum Portfolio Selection

when short sales are permitted and the second condition are the short sales that are not

permitted in selecting the optimum portfolio.5 In finalizing the study Lintner made the

following conclusions in equilibrium: (1) the same combination of risky assets will be

optimal for every investor (2) the investment amount invested in each risky asset will

be equivalent to the ratio of the aggregate market value of risky asset (3) each

investment amount in the individual risky assets must therefore be a positive amount.

2.3.3 Fisher Black

In 1972, Fisher Black examined the validity of the assumptions made by Sharpe

(1964) and Lintner (1965) in deriving the model. He gave two restrictions to the early

assumptions of the model in exploring the nature of capital market equilibrium. He

assumed that there is no riskless asset and that no riskless borrowing or lending is

allowed. Black (1972) stated that the assumption of availability of riskless borrowing

5 Short selling is a technique used by investors who try to profit from the falling price of the stock.

Page 40: Phd Thesis

24

and lending is not realistic since restrictions on short selling are at least as stringent as

restrictions on borrowing. The relaxation of the assumptions of the model gave much

empirical sound background for the model. This study is identified as the first

extension to the initial work of Sharpe and Lintner.

In deriving the CAPM Sharpe (1964) and Lintner (1965) assumed that

there was a riskless asset in the investment opportunity set, and the

first significant extension of their work was by Black (1972) who

showed that the assumption of a riskless asset could be dispensed with.

(Ross 1977: 177).

By imposing restrictions on the assumption he confirmed that the expected return on

any risky asset is a linear function of its β, just as previous work of Sharpe (1964) and

Lintner (1965) were without any restrictions.

In summary, all theorists express optimal portfolios using the vector of (expected

mean) returns and variance. Initially Markowitz examines risky assets with E-V

efficient set, whereas Tobin employs a riskless asset in order to derive a liner

opportunity locus and finally Black utilized two fund separation theorem to construct

zero beta CAPM.

The work of Black presented the model more meaningfully and compressively than

the previous studies of Sharpe (1964) and Lintner (1965). The deriving process of the

model was completed with the work of Black and the name of the model became

popular as the SLB model in honor of Sharpe (1964), Lintner (1965) and Black

(1972).

Page 41: Phd Thesis

25

Table 2.1: Characteristics of the Models

Characteristics Sharpe

(1964)

Lintner

(1965)

Black

(1972)

Single Period/Multi Period Single Single Single

Allows Short Sales No Yes Yes

Allows Leverage Disallowed Allowed Disallowed

Mean-variance objective function yes yes Yes

Market itself is efficient No Yes Yes

Market /Consumption-oriented Market Market Market

Discrete time/Continuous time Discrete Discrete Discrete

Source: Adopted from Table 2 of French (2003)

Table 2.1 summarizes the main characteristics of the key studies that contributed

towards the development of CAPM. The models of Sharpe (1964), Lintner (1965) and

Black (1972) have much in common. All are single- period discrete -time models and

market-focused, as opposed to consumption-focused. The most fundamental

similarities are that each rest on the foundations of Markowitz (1952) and Tobin

(1958) built upon the utility of wealth literature that assumes agents are risk-averters

with convex loci of constant expected utility of wealth represented as indifference

curves in the mean variance plane.

In contrasts, Sharpe (1964) explicitly disallowed the short sales in the model. Sharpe

(1964: 437) reports that a combination (of asset i plus an efficient combination of

asset g ) in which asset i does not appear at all must be represented by some negative

value of α not expressly allowing the overt negative holding of asset i.

But rather as a device which allows us to interpret point g’ in such a fashion without

any actual short sales having occurred. Lintner (1965: 19) has included short sales in

computing returns on a stock in his study, while Black has not addressed the concept

of short sales.

Page 42: Phd Thesis

26

Another aspect which diverges each study is leverage. Sharpe (1964) disallows

leverage (borrowings) via his non negativity constraints on all assets, including the

risk free asset, he discussed the possibility Sharpe (1964: 433) if the investor can

borrow this is equivalent to disinvesting in risk free asset. Lintner (1965: 15) allows

for borrowings while Black (1972: 452) has not allowed borrowing.

2.3.4 The CAPM as it stands today

As previously explained, the CAPM proposes a theory to explain market equilibrium

under risky conditions. The model states that under certain assumptions the expected

return on any capital asset for a single period will satisfy:

fmifi RRERRE )()( (2.11)

where iR is the return on asset i for the period and is equal to the change in the price

of the asset, plus any dividends, interest, or other distributions, divided by the price of

the asset at the start of period, mR is the return on market portfolio of all assets taken

together; Rf is the return on a riskless asset for the period; βi is the market sensitivity

of asset i and is equal to the slope of the regression line relating iR and mR The

market sensitivity βi of asset i is defined algebraically by:

)var(/),cov( mmii RRR (2.12)

What is stated in equation 2.8 as the βi (beta value) of a specific share indicates its

marginal contribution to the risk of the entire market portfolio of risky securities.

Shares with a beta coefficient greater than 1 have an above-average effect on the risk

of the aggregate portfolio, whereas shares with a beta coefficient of less than 1 have a

lower than average effect on the risk of the aggregate portfolio. According to the

CAPM, the risk premium in an efficient capital market and thus, the expected return

on an asset will vary in direct proportion to the beta value. These relations are

generated by equilibrium price formation for efficient capital markets.

Page 43: Phd Thesis

27

Risk Factors of the Model

It decomposes a portfolio‘s risk into systematic and specific risk. Systematic risk is

the risk of holding market portfolio. As the market moves each individual asset is

more or less affected to the extent that any asset that participates in such general

market moves entails a systematic risk. Specific risk is the risk which is unique to

individual asset. It represents the component of an asset‘s return which is uncorrelated

with general market moves. As stated in CAPM the marketplace compensates

investors for taking systematic risk, but not taking specific risk. This is because the

specific risk can be diversified. The categorization of risk into two components was

first developed by Harry Markowitz in 1950s as discussed in Section 2.2.2 in the

previous section. Sharpe (1964) identifies two components of risk as systematic and

unsystematic risk;

Moreover, such points may be scattered throughout the feasible region,

with no consistent relationship between their expected return and total

risk. However, there will be a consistent relationship between their

expected returns and what might best be called systematic risk. (Sharpe

1964: 436).

Assumptions of the Model

The assumptions that are generally used in deriving equation (2.8) are as follows: (a)

all investors have the same opinions about the possibilities of various end-of-period

values for all assets. They have a common joint probability distribution for the return

on the available asset. (b) The common probability distribution describing the

possible returns on the available assets is joint normal. (c) Investors choose portfolios

that maximize their expected end-of-period utility of wealth and all investors are risk

averse.6 (d) An investor may take a long or short position of any size in any asset,

6 This assumption© places the analysis within the framework of Markowitz one-period mean –standard

deviation portfolio model.

Page 44: Phd Thesis

28

including the riskless asset. Any investor may borrow or lend any amount he wants at

the riskless rate of interest.

Emergence of this model (CAPM) took the world of finance by storm. This

remarkable finding of the model filled the long waited void in the field of finance. As

stated in the previous section, the concept of asset pricing and valuation initiated from

the 1930s. However, CAPM has received wider acceptance from the academics and

professionals who used the model in making investment decisions in the stock

markets. The model is still used as a valid model in determining stock returns of the

common stocks in the capital markets. The CAPM attempts to capture the pricing of

capital asset under condition of market equilibrium which indicates that in

equilibrium total asset holdings of all investors must equal the total supply of assets.

2.3.5 Capital Market Line (CML) and the CAPM

A useful representation of CML is shown in Figure 2.4, the horizontal axes of the

graph represent the expected return and the vertical line represents the risk. The area

shown in a curly bracket is the pure interest rate. In equilibrium capital market prices

adjusted so that the rational investor can attain any desired point along a capital

market line. She/he may obtain a higher expected rate of return on his security only by

accepting additional risk. In effect, the market presents him with two prices. First, the

price of time or the pure interest rate as shown in Figure 2.4 and the second is price

of risk that is the additional expected return per unit of risk borne.

Page 45: Phd Thesis

29

Figure 2.4: Capital Market Line

pure Interest Rate

0

Expected Rate of Return

Capital Market Line Risk

Source: Figure 1 of Sharpe (1964)

The line which measures the relationship between systematic risk and expected return

in financial markets is usually named as the Security Market Line (SML). This is a

very important concept in finance because it is a useful tool in determining whether an

asset being included in a portfolio offers a reasonable return for risk. The decision

criteria in SML is that if security‘s risk vs expected returns is plotted above SML it is

undervalued stock because the investor can get greater return for inherent risk. A

security plotted below the SML is overvalued because the investor would be

accepting less return for the amount of risk assumed. The SML is essentially a graph

which represents the results derived from the CAPM. Thus, the equation for the SML

is fmifi RRERRE )()~

( which is exactly same as CAPM. The x-axis

represents the risk (beta) and the y-axis represents the expected return. The market

risk premium is determined by the slope of the SML.

Page 46: Phd Thesis

30

2.4 Major issues of the model and empirical tests

The previous section discussed the deriving of the model citing the major contribution

for the CAPM from prominent scholars during 1960s and 1970s. Since then several

empirical studies have been conducted in various stock markets in the world

preserving the fundamental aspects of the original CAPM. The purpose of this section

is to explore those studies in the context of the current study. Apart from that, the

major issues discovered from these studies will also be explored in the context of the

practical application of the model.

2.4.1 The Asset Returns in CAPM

Under the CAPM, a return to an asset is determined by three guidelines. First, all asset

must have an expected return at least equal to the risk-free asset (except negative beta

stocks). The rational is that any risky asset must be expected to return at least as

much as one without risk or there is no incentive for anyone for holding risky assets.

The second guideline is that there is no expected return for taking unsystematic risk

since it can be easily avoided by diversification. Diversification simple does not

affect the economies of the asset held by the investors. Therefore, there is no

compensation inherent in the model for accepting this needless risk by choosing to

hold asset in isolation. Finally, assets that are subject to systematic risk are expected

to yield a return greater than risk-free rate. This premium should be incremental to the

risk-free rate by an amount proportional to the amount of this risk (beta) present in the

assets. This risk cannot be diversified away and must be borne by the investor if the

assets are to be financed and employed productively. The higher the systematic risk,

the higher the average long-term returns must be for holder to be willing to accept the

risk.

2.4.2 Econometric Problem of the Model

Miller and Scholes (1972) and several other studies provide an analysis of the

econometric problems inherent in the early empirical tests of the CAPM. Many of

these issues are important to discuss in the context of the study as they are very much

common to capital market based research. First, the distributions of asset returns are

Page 47: Phd Thesis

31

likely somewhat skewed due to the limited liability of financial asset returns,

irrespective of the firm size. The assets pricing models discussed in this study assume

that stock returns are normally distributed in all the sample companies. This

assumption is further confirmed by Fama and French (1996) and concludes that

return distributions are very close to normal and the assumption of normality is

reasonable7.

Miller and Scholes (1972) demonstrate that the most damaging problem in the early

tests of the CAPM is the error-in-variables problem. The error-in-variable problem

exists because the risk beta estimated in the first-pass time-series regressions are

estimated with some degree of error. However, researchers have used various

methods to counter this problem. For example Kothari, Shanken and Sloan (1995),

Kandel, Shmuel et al.(1995) and others shows that beta is alive if annual returns are

used. Much has been written by Cooper and Ejarque (2001) and others about what

constitutes a good index they argued that ideally, an index is transparent, unbiased,

rules based, investable and above all, representative of a given market.8 Other

evidences reports that this issue can be minimized if more than one market portfolio is

available to a country and apply them for the model as market proxies.

2.4.3 The CAPM and the Real World Market

In the real world portfolio theory of Markowitz (1952) and the CAPM of SLB have

become widely accepted tools in making investment decisions in the practitioner

community. Many investment professionals believe that the distinction between firm-

specific and systematic risk are comfortable with the use of beta to measure the

systematic risk in making investment decisions. Douglas (1969) found two drawbacks

that hinders the validity of the CAPM and he is the first to cast doubt on the empirical

7 Basic Book, New York.

8 Christopherson, Jon A., David R. Carino and Wayne E. Ferson. 2009. Portfolio Performance

Measurement and Benchmarking. McGraw Hill.

Page 48: Phd Thesis

32

validity of the model. First, contradiction to the prediction of the theory that

unsystematic risk did seem to explain average returns. Second, the estimated security

market line was too shallow; it was greater than the risk free rate, implying that

defensive stocks β < 1 tended to have positive alphas, while aggressive stocks β > 1

tended to have negative alphas.

Four years later Miller and Scholes (1972) published a paper demonstrating

formidable statistical problems that hinder a straightforward test similar to Douglas.

They estimated the potential error that may have resulted from each step of Douglas‘s

procedure and were able to rationalize his findings. However, Miller and Scholes‘s

explanation does not by itself provide positive evidence that the CAPM is valid. Later

studies, most notably Black, Jensen and Scholes (1972) and Fama and MacBeth

(1973) used procedures designed to address the various econometric problems. The

most important of these was to test the CAPM using logically constructed portfolios

to diminish the statistical noise resulting from firm specific risk. These efforts were

also not sufficient to establish the validity of the CAPM.

While all these accumulated evidence against the CAPM remained largely within the

ivory towers of academia, Roll‘s (1977) study titled as ―A Critique of Capital Asset

Pricing Tests‖ shook the practitioner world as well. Roll argued that since the true

market portfolio can never be observed, the CAPM is necessary untreatable. The

publicity of the new classic Roll‘s critique resulted in popular articles such as ―Is Beta

Dead‖? that effectively showed the permeation of portfolio theory through the world

of finance. This is quite ironic since, although Roll is absolutely correct on theoretical

grounds, some tests suggest that the error introduced by using a broad market index as

proxy for the true, unobserved market portfolio is perhaps the lesser of the problems

involved in testing the CAPM.

2.4.4 Empirical studies of the CAPM and Different versions of CAPM

The capital asset pricing model (CAPM) of Sharpe (1964), Lintner (1965) and Black

(1966) has played a central role in finance theory and financial practice. According to

available evidence among the assets pricing models, CAPM is the most reliable model

to estimate the cost of equity capital. Graham and Harvey (2001) report that the

Page 49: Phd Thesis

33

CAPM is the most popular model to estimate the cost of equity capital. Even though

CAPM a is popular model, its application issues such as the time varying nature of

beta addressed by researchers (Henry, Olekalns and Shields 2004; Henry, Olekalns

and Lakshman 2007; Henry 2009) is very dominant. Apart from that the applicability

of past returns for the projection of future returns and difficulty to determine the

market proxy in the real world the researchers were encouraged to find new versions

of CAPM that have emerged in the finance literature. Numerous studies show (see

Fama and French 1992; Jagannathan and Wang 1996; Strong and Xu 1997; Lettau

and Ludvigson 2001) that the standard CAPM using the stock market index as a proxy

for the market portfolio performing poorly in explaining cross-sectional stock returns

in both emerging and developed markets.

The recent studies by Harvey and Siddique (2000) and Dittmar (2002) highlight the

superior performance of the three-moment CAPM. The three moment CAPM assume

that any rational investor chooses its portfolio using only the first three moments of

securities return distribution and four-moment CAPM (KCAPM) relative to the

standard CAPM in US stock returns. Dittmar finds that the best performance is by a

conditional version of the four-moment CAPM. Incorporating a proxy for human

capital in the market portfolio as in Jagannathan and Wang (1996) plays a critical role

in the superior performance of the four-moment CAPM. Dittmar (2002) also finds

that the conditional four-moment CAPM performs well relative to the Fama and

French (1993), model even though the factors in the four moments CAPM are

motivated from the theory.

2.4.5 Empirical Contradiction of the CAPM

A large number of studies have previously been conducted by various researchers on

CAPM, apart from the above mentioned studies. A prominent study of Nicolaas

(1999) investigated the nature of the time-variation in betas which indicates that beta

is not constant through time. In this study they focus on the validity of CAPM when

the beta is time varying. The beta was estimated using different methods of

regressions such as recursive regressions, rolling regressions and Kalman Filter. They

conclude that beta is not constant through time. They mainly argued that beta of any

Page 50: Phd Thesis

34

security should be changed when the capital structure of the firm varies from time to

time. The main implication of this work was that CAPM does not give proper results

under this condition. Nicolas‘s findings empirically invalidated the CAPM on

empirical ground.

Another extensive work of Davis (1997) presents a method for solving the multiform

stochastic growth model Brock by (2001) whose asset pricing model forms an

intertemporal general equilibrium theory of capital asset pricing. A number of issues

in financial economics can be addressed with the solution to this dynamic model.

They have found that the market portfolio is a mean-variance efficient in a dynamic

context.

Bossaerts, Fine and Ledyard (2002) examined the CAPM in thin experimental

financial markets. This study was based on the Chicago market. Their argument was

in support of CAPM and the finding was that the CAPM principles appear at work

even when markets are thin. In testing the original CAPM, Ho-Chan and Huang

(2000) suggests to allow the beta risk coming from two different regimes namely, a

high-risk regime and low-risk regime. He finds that two regime assumptions are

accepted and CAPM is consistent with the data in the low risk state but is inconsistent

with the data high risk state. This was further investigated by Huang (2003) who

concluded that betas are unstable over time and the data may be consistent with

CAPM in one regime, but inconsistent in the other regime.

A study conducted by Gonzalez (2001) tested the CAPM performance in Venezuela

market for the period 1992-1998 and concluded that CAPM cannot be used to predict

assets returns in the Venezuela market. They have found that CAPM assumptions do

not apply in the Venezuela and invalidate the CAPM in predicting the cross sectional

variation of stock returns in the Venezuela market. However, they have found two

important results: first, the model appears to be linear and second, there are other

factors that influence Stock returns. They recommended the extension of the CAPM

and to design other multifactor linear models that takes into consideration other

economy-related variables.

Page 51: Phd Thesis

35

In the time being the credibility of CAPM gradually declined due to the subsequent

contradictory findings of the studies stated above. Roll in 1977 found devastating

findings to the CAPM and highly criticized the validity of CAPM beta. Roll‘s

argument is comprehensively explained in the next section.

2.4.6 Roll’s Critique of Tests of the CAPM

Richard Roll in 1977 and 1978 wrote papers in which he criticized (1) empirical

testing of the CAPM (2) the use of beta as a risk measure and (3) measures of

portfolio performance employing the security market line as a benchmark. The three

parts of the paper were later published separately. Here only part 1 will be discussed,

as part 2 and 3 are essentially the same arguments. Roll‘s critique of test of the CAPM

can be divided into two parts. First, he claims that the results of tests like those of BJS

and FM (will be discussed in details subsequently) are tautological. That is, it is

probable that one would obtain results no matter how stocks were priced in relation to

risk in the real world. If that is true we have learned little or nothing about the

structure of stock prices from these tests, and CAPM has never really been tested.

Therefore, the current study attempts to test the CAPM under high and low volatile

situations, in both Sri Lankan and US markets. This is a novel work that separately

tests the model during crisis and non crisis periods of both stock markets. Testing the

Model under crisis situation is particularly important because when there is an

economic crisis the market fundamentals such as inflation, interest rates, money

supply, exchange rates etc. will change dramatically. In the history of capital markets

in the world, crises have occurred from time to time in different degrees in both

developed and emerging markets.

A large number of studies have attempted to discover a better fit model than CAPM

by introducing new variables. Section 2.4 deals with the post CAPM development and

the reliability of post CAPM findings in the better prediction of variation of stock

returns.

Page 52: Phd Thesis

36

2.5 Post CAPM and Pre-FF3F Development of Literature

It was evident from the previous discussions that the popular CAPM which was

developed in 1960s was the widely accepted model among professionals and others.

However, its acceptance was short lived as researchers found other factors, in addition

to the market beta of the CAPM in determining the average stock returns in the capital

markets. These factors are known as the CAPM anomalies in the finance literature.

Post CAPM developments in the literature clearly damage the popularity of the

CAPM and researchers started to investigate other characteristics of the stock returns

in 1970s and 1980s. This section presents a detailed analysis of anomalies until the

discovery of FF3F in 1990s.

2.5.1 January effect

This study will not be complete without testing the January effect in addition to the

CAPM and FF3F. Because January effect has close links with these two models, both

FF3F and January effect are considered as CAPM anomalies. It is also interesting and

timely important to fill the void in the literature to test the presence of January effect

in the six portfolios formed as big and small in these two markets. Another important

fact is that these two markets are in two streams; namely emerging market (CSE) and

developed markets (US). Therefore, the findings of the test can be generalized

separately for these two markets, giving due recognition to each model. In addition,

research evidences has revealed that small firms generate higher returns than big firms

during January in most of the market in the world. Currently researchers are interested

in emerging markets and they have started to look for more focused studies such as

stock market anomalies.

The anomaly of January effect historically emerged with the landmark discovery of

of Keim (1983) who has conducted a study on monthly seasonality by using data on

shares traded on NYSE and AMEX for the period from 1963 to 1979 and reported

that significantly higher returns are observed for the Month of January than other

months. And also they found that over 50% of returns have occurred during the first

week of January. His study has also documented that the January effect is extensively

higher for small firms and firms with low stock prices. This study will immensely

Page 53: Phd Thesis

37

reshape the study of Keim (1983) as it applies six small and big portfolios for testing

the January effect in the US market. These tests guarantee that this is a comprehensive

study compared to the previous studies of this nature.

This study attempts to further investigate modalities of these phenomena by testing

the January effect for Small Low (SL), Small Medium (SM), Small High (SH), Big

Low (BL), Big Medium (BM) and Big High (BH) portfolios.9 Thus, the results will

give widespread information about the firms in these portfolios for concerned parties

like fund managers. The FF3F will be tested along with the January returns, taking

weekly data for long period particularly in the US (from 1964 -2008). This

empirically extended work also attempts to measure the responses of FF3F to January

effect. The outcome of the test very widely describes the return patterns of small and

big portfolios in January and the responses of stock prices to factors such as tax lost

selling hypothesis.

It is considered that an anomaly inconsistent with the concept of market efficiency in

financial market is the January effect. The January or turn of the year effect refers to

unusually high returns earned by the common stocks of small firms, beginning on the

last trading day of December and continuing in to January, with the effect becoming

less pronounced as the month progresses. The researchers who investigated on capital

market seasonality have discovered higher returns in January compared to other

months in several markets, particularly in U.S markets.

Early Evidence on January effect

The January effect first mentioned by Wachtel (1942) is more particular for small

capitalization companies. A more formal investigation is due to Rozeff and Kinney

(1976). In addition, Gultekin and Gultekin (1983) provide evidence in support of the

January effect for the U.S. and other industrialized countries. More recently,

Aggrawal and Tandon (1994) investigated monthly anomalies in eighteen countries,

9 These will be discussed in detail in Chapter 3.

Page 54: Phd Thesis

38

other than the U.S. Some of the important studies are Rozeff and Kinney (1976), Roll

(1983) and Lakonishok and Smidt (1984) who reported on the January effect in

corporate bond market. Wilson and Jones (1990) found the January effect to be

prevalent in the commercial paper market.

Previous studies in international finance indicate that the January effect extends to the

market for the U.S dollar. Angrist and Stanley (1991) notes higher returns in January

of every year for the period of 1980 through 1989, except in 1986 and 1987.

Reinganum (1983) documented the presence of January effect in the market for the

U.S dollar over a longer sample period of 1975-1990, and during strong dollar sub-

periods of 1981 through June, 1985 and 1989. They also found higher returns in

January for each of the years 1977, 1979, 1988 and 1989. The other popular studies of

(Keim 1983; Roll 1983) have found that a significant portion of the size premium to

small firms occurs in January. Brown and Donald (1983) examined the monthly

seasonal patterns of all the industrial firms listed on the Australian Stock Exchange

for the period from 1958 to 1979 and found high average returns in December and

January.

The January effect is one of the mostly debated anomalies in finance literature and it

is recognized as the most common anomaly among other calendar anomalies such as

day of week effect, holiday effect etc.

Main Causes of January Effect

Another explanation is that the January effect is caused by portfolio managers

engaging in window dressing at year end. Selling of losing and risky stocks and

holding instead cash blue chip stocks to mark yearend portfolios appear more

conservative. The other motive of portfolio managers is locking in their bonuses

which are typically based on the rate of returns achieved during the year as at the

beginning of the year portfolio managers utilize the allocated funds. If portfolios

produce satisfactory returns, during the year many managers will be inclined to lock

in order to secure their annual bonuses by reducing the risk profile of their portfolios.

As a new financial year begins in January the cycle starts all over again as managers

Page 55: Phd Thesis

39

move funds back into stocks. These evidences will also be dominant factors for the

January effect in most of the markets.

In this study the existence of January effect in the Sri Lankan market and US market

will be examined. Here the test is carried out with the portfolios formed as big and

small. This approach is different from other previous studies in several ways; (1 )

testing of January effect for six portfolios formed as big and small based on size and

book-to-market ratio (2) use of weekly excess returns for the cross sectional

regressions and (3) most recent data is applied in both markets. Thus, the main

objective of this extended work is to re-investigate the January effect in US market by

applying the Fama and French portfolios and extend the work to Sri Lankan emerging

market to uncover January effect in the Colombo Stock Exchange. Hence, this

research further extends its analysis to examine the existence of the January effect

during the period from 1964 to 2008 in the US market. The methods used in this study

are methodologically different from the previous studies such as Drew, Naughton and

Veeraraghavan (2003) who added a dummy variable, which takes a value of 1 in

January, in the three factor model and this study tests the effect by running separate

regression tests for January months‘ data. By doing so, a comparison can be made

between January and other period (months) in the three factor model.

2.5.2 Size effect

The size effect was one of the first discovered anomalies of the CAPM and it is well

documented in historical academic literature. The size effect literature became

dominant in the field of finance in 1980s. The main investigators include, Banz

(1981) Keim (1983) and Reinganum (1982). These studies find that small market

capitalization stocks tend to outperform large capitalization stocks after adjusting for

market risk factors. In the landmark paper Chan and Hsieh (1985) examine the

behavior of size effect in the context of Ross‘ 1976 APT model using Chen, Roll and

Ross (1986) risk factors.

Several researchers have given numerous reasons for the anomalous behavior of

stock prices due to size effect. Roll (1983) conjectures that the size effect may be a

statistical artifact of improperly measured risk. In an important study of Scholes and

Page 56: Phd Thesis

40

Williams (1977) it is stated that non-synchronous trading of securities imparts a

downward bias to the estimated beta when the underline security trades infrequently.

Similarly, a study undertaken by Dimson (1979) suggests that trading infrequency

biases beta estimates and predicts a downwards bias for infrequently traded shares and

an upward bias for frequently traded shares. Closely following the work of Scholes

and Williams (1977) Reinganum (1982) and Dimson (1979), interesting findings were

emerged by Keim (1983). First, there is no distinguishable relation between the OLS

estimates of beta and firm size measured by market value of equity. Second, although

the Scholes and Williams beta estimates for smaller firms that are generally larger

than the corresponding OLS estimates, there is still is no distinct ordering of beta in

line with the firm size. Third, the Dimson beta estimate for the portfolio of smallest

firms is significantly higher than the largest firm portfolio beta and there is a near

monotone declining relation between firm size and Dimson beta.

The above evidences suggest that the size anomaly impairs the credibility of the

CAPM. Even though CAPM was well accepted in 1960s, its reliability gradually

declined in 1980s with the findings of the size effect in stock returns. Apart from

these studies in late 1980s, researcher looked for the other risk factors that determine

the stock price.

2.5.3 Momentum effect

There are significant volumes of studies about the anomaly of momentum effect in the

historical fiancé literature. Many investment advisors and other researchers believe

that momentum strategies yield significant profit for the investors. The momentum

effect first investigated by Jegadeesh and Titman (1993) examined a variety of

momentum strategies. They demonstrate that buying the well performing portfolios of

NYSE and AMEX stocks and selling the low performing portfolios produce

significant positive abnormal returns. In a subsequent study, Jegadeesh and Titman

(2001) further investigated the work of 1993 and conducted various explanations to

their previous study. Interestingly they found similar results in 2001 even after eight

years from their original work and confirm that the momentum profits are not purely

due to the data snooping. Conrad and Kaul (1998) argues that momentum profits arise

Page 57: Phd Thesis

41

because of cross-sectional differences in expected returns, rather than time series

return pattern. Hong and Stein (1999), present behavioral models which suggest that

the post holding period returns of momentum portfolio should be negative. The

reliability of the CAPM further inspired the work of Jegadeesh and Titman who

unearthed the momentum effect.

2.5.4 The Black, Jesnsen and Scholes Test (1972)

The study of Black, Jensen, and Scholes (BJS) does not directly test the prediction

that the market portfolio is on the efficient set like in CAPM and portfolio theory.

They concentrate instead, on the security market line. It is a well known fact that if

the market portfolio is efficient, it follows automatically that a liner positive sloped

the relationship exists between betas and expected rate of return. If investors can

borrow and lend at a risk-free rate, it also follows that a zero stock or portfolio can be

expected to produce a return equal to the risk-free rate. The empirical test of BJS is

designed to test these properties of the security market line. BJS restrict their initial

sample to all stocks traded on the NYSE during the period 1926 through 1965. They

start their study with the exchange (NYSE) throughout this period, using as a market

index an equally weighed portfolio of all stocks on the NYSE. Nest they rank the

stocks on the basis of beta and formed 10 portfolios with 10 percent of the stocks with

the highest betas into portfolio 1 and so on.

Then, they compute the rates of return to each of the portfolios in each of the 12

months of 1931. At the end of this year, they again compute the betas for every stock

on the exchange for the period 1927 through 1931 and they reform the 10 portfolios.

BJS repeat this process each year, 1931 through 1965, obtaining a series of monthly

rates of return for each of the 10 portfolios. They now attempt to estimate the

expected rates of return and beta factors for each of the portfolios by taking sample

estimates from the rates of return.

The sample estimates of the expected value are of course the arithmetic mean of

return. This is the unbiased estimator of the expected rate of return at the beginning of

each of portfolio returns to their market index, while they take sample estimates for

the overall period 1931 through 1965.

Page 58: Phd Thesis

42

2.5.5 Fama–Macbeth Study (1974)

Fama and MacBeth (1974) also direct their attention to the properties of the security

market line. Their study, however, fundamentally differs from that of BJS in that they

attempt to predict the future rates of return of portfolios on the basis of risk variables

estimated in previous periods. Fama and MacBeth examine the time varying nature of

CAPM beta.

Their procedure and database is the same as that of BJS. They also use the same index

of the market portfolio, an equally weighted portfolio of all stocks on the NYSE. They

begin by computing the beta factor for every stock that was listed on the NYSE in the

period 1926 through 1929. They then rank the stocks by beta and form 20 portfolios

in the same procedure as BJS. Thereafter, they estimate the beta of each portfolio by

relating monthly returns to their market index in the period 1930 to 1934. At the end

of 1934 they have an estimate of beta factor for each of the portfolios and they use

these betas to predict the portfolio returns in the subsequent months of the period

1935 through 1938. For each of the months they relate the monthly returns on the

portfolios to the betas to obtain monthly estimates of the market line.

To determine whether the security market line exhibits any evidence of nonlinearity,

FM now add on an additional term to the relationship, the square of the beta factor.

The relationship is now three-dimensional with the returns to the portfolios on one

axis and with beta and square on the other two.

The CAPM also predicts that beta or systematic risk is the only determinant of

expected security returns. Residual variance is unimportant in determining the price

and expected rate of return of a stock as portfolio investors can diversify it away. FM

tested this prediction of CAPM by including a residual variance term in the

relationship. The 20 portfolios are equally weighted and include a large number of

stocks, so the residual variance for each portfolio should be relatively small.

However, to determine whether the residual variance of a stock affects its price and

therefore, its parent portfolio‘s expected rate of return, FM included in the

relationship is the average residual variance of the stocks in each portfolio.

Page 59: Phd Thesis

43

At the end of this period, they calculate fresh estimates of the beta coefficients for the

portfolios by repeating the entire process. That is, they estimate stock betas in the

period 1930 through 1933. They then form portfolios and estimate portfolio betas in

the period 1934 through 1938. The sample estimate of the expected value is the

arithmetic mean rate of return. This is the unbiased estimator of the expected rate of

return at the beginning of each individual month. They estimate the beta of each

portfolio by relating the portfolio returns to their market index while they take

estimates for the overall period 1931 through 1965.

2.6 Emergence of Fama and French three factor model

The short comings and some methodological issues documented on the CAPM and

other anomalies led to the emergence of the FF3F historically. As explained in the

above section, several papers have severely criticized the single factor as the whole

determinant of average return of stock prices. Roll‘s Critique is one of prominent

shortcomings of the CAPM that has emerged historically. The period 1980s was the

crucial time for the CAPM, as it was the period with the most significant CAPM

anomalies uncovered by researchers.

Fama and French (1992) introduced two other factors; namely market equity and

book-equity to market equity (size and BE/ME) that can explain the cross section of

stock returns, in addition to the CAPM. They found that the three factors of the model

explain 95% of the variation of stock returns, while it was only 70% of explanatory

power along with the CAPM beta. Furthermore, advancing their findings in 1992

Fama and French (1993) confirm that portfolios constructed to mimic risk factors

related to size and BE/ME add substantially to the variation of stock returns

explained by a market portfolio. As their model comprises of three factors it was

popularly known as ―Three Factor Model.‖ These risk factors will be discussed in

detail comprehensively in Section 3.3 in Chapter 3.

The rest of this section is organized into five subsections. The first subsection

highlights the properties of the FF3F in the real market place. The second explains the

salient features of the risk factors of the FF3F. The empirical studies that use the FF3F

Page 60: Phd Thesis

44

are examined in the third which is the Subsection 2.6.3. The fourth examines the

differences and the similarities of the CAPM and the FF3F. The last subsection briefs

on other multi factor models, with special focus on Arbitrage Pricing Model (APT).

2.6.1 Properties of the FF3F

As explained above, in addition to the CAPM, beta the FF3F comprises of two other

factors—size and BE/ME. The size factor compares the weighted average market

value of the stock in a portfolio to the weighted average market value of stocks in the

markets. The BE/ME factor compares the amount of value exposure in relation to the

market. Value stocks are companies that yield low earnings growth rates, high

dividends, and high book value. The FF3F measures the performance of high BE/ME

stocks against low BE/ME stocks.

2.6.2 Risk Proxies of the model

In this subsection the discussion is focused on the risk proxies of the FF3F. Here only

SMB and HML are explained as the market factor is common to the CAPM and

FF3F. Construction of the factors and the steps involved in the process will be

discussed in Chapter 3. Here, more attention is given to the theoretical and the

practical aspect of the two risk factors of the model.

In practice SMB factor represent size premium and SMB stands for Small minus Big.

This is designed to measure the additional returns the investors have historically

received by investing in stocks in companies with relatively small market

capitalization stocks. A positive SMB in a period indicates that small cap stock

outperformed large cap stock in that period.10

The other factor is HML which stands for High minus low constructed to measure the

value premium provided to investors for investing in companies with high-book-to

market value. A positive HML in a period indicates that value stocks outperformed

growth stock in that period. A negative HML in a given period indicates the growth

10 Period may be daily, weekly or monthly data.

Page 61: Phd Thesis

45

stocks outperformed. In recent years the value strategy has generated considerable

interest among the fund managers. Value firms appear to earn much higher long-term

returns than those with low BE/ME firms.

2.6.3 Empirical studies of the model.

Alternative assets pricing models, another response to the poor performance of the

CAPM, has been the development of empirical factor models such as Fama and

French (1993) or Carhart (1997) where the factors capture different anomalies such as

size and book-to-market ratio. However, these models affected by the problem that

the factors are not motivated from theory.

Fama and French (1993) introduced a three-factor model in which factors include the

return on a broad stock index, the excess return on a portfolio of small stocks over a

portfolio of large stocks, and the excess return on a portfolio of high book-to-market

stocks over a portfolio of low book –to- market stocks. Carhart (1997) augmented the

model to include a portfolio of stocks with high returns over the past few months.

These models broadly capture the performance of stock portfolios grouped according

to these characteristics, with the partial exception of the smallest value stocks. The

interpretation of this evidence has received much attention by Simpson and

Ramchander (2008) in the literature and continues to be a subject of ample debate.

On the one hand, researchers argue that ME and BE/ME are company-specific

factors–which means that the risk associated with them might be eliminated through

diversification–rather than pervasive risk factors or state variables, and therefore the

observed significance of the FF3F factors is indicative of irrational investor behavior

or market inefficiencies (see for example Lakonishok, Shleifer and Vishny 1994; La

Porta 1996). Still others, such as Kothari, Shanken and Sloan and MacKinlay

(MacKinlay 1995), cite several reasons, (including sample selection biases, data

mining, beta estimation, and trading frictions), in downplaying the economic

importance of the FF3F factors.

2.6.4 CAPM and FF3F similarities and Differences

It is considered that CAPM has at least one strong advantage from the analysis‘s point

of view. The derivation of CAPM necessarily brings the reader through a discussion

Page 62: Phd Thesis

46

of efficient sets of investments. The CAPM mainly describe the pricing of asset in

equilibrium. In the CAPM the expected return is expressed as a function of risk or

beta. The model bases on the idea that all risk affect the stock prices. Only systematic

risk is considered in determining the prices. Conversely, Fama and French argue that

size (SMB) and book-to-market ratio (HML) capture the cross sectional differences of

expected returns. Both models use risk factors as the predictors of the model. The

only difference of the FF3F is that it applies two more company fundamental factors,

in addition to the market factor. However, researchers and professionals still use

CAPM widely than FF3F in different occasions in practice.

2.6.5 CAPM, FF3F and Multi-Risk Factor Models

The asset pricing theory has been expanded to multiple sources of risk in important

studies by Ross (1976), Sharpe (1982), Merton (1973) and Long (1974). The intuition

of these models is that assets have exposures to various types of risk such as inflation

risk, business-cycle risk, interest rate risk, exchange rate risk, and default risk

regression are sometimes called factor loadings, risk sensitivities or risk exposures.

The models which attempt to capture these risk factors are known as multi-risk factor

models. However, the multi factor models maintain the basic idea of the CAPM

which suggests that the higher the exposure, the greater the expected return on the

asset. Some important studies on multifactor asset pricing formulations which tried to

explain average returns with average risk loadings are Roll and Ross (1980) and

Chen, Roll and Ross (1986). However, these studies assume that risk is constant, risk

premiums are constant and expected returns are constant.

Ferson and Harvey (1993) examined a model which uses multiple factors, but allows

all the parameters of the model shift through time. Ferson and Harvey in their study

titled ―The Risk and Predictability of International Asset Returns‖ extended the

dynamic factor model to an international setting. In ―predictable Risk and Returns in

Emerging Markets,‖ Harvey explores a similar formulation in emerging capital

markets.

Among the multi factor models, the Arbitrage Pricing Theory (APT) due to Ross

(1976) is very popular among researchers as it provides many advantages to them.

Page 63: Phd Thesis

47

One important advantage of the APT is that it can handle multiple factors, while the

CAPM ignores them totally and as does the FF3F to some extent. The multi factor

model is probably more reflective of reality than single factor models. One cannot

actually build an optimal portfolio along with the APT. It is essential to list out the

factors and estimate the returns for exposure to risk for each factor. Some advocates

of the APT have said one should just estimate expected returns empirically. Sharpe

(1998) argues that is very dangerous because historic average returns can differ

monumentally from expected returns in empirical investigations. To address this issue

a factor model is needed to reduce the dimensions, whether it is a three- factor model

or a five-factor model or a 14 asset-class factor model, which is what we tend to use

in application. The APT says that if returns are generated by a factor model, then

without making any strong assumptions in addition to the model which is strong to

begin with, one cannot assign numeric values to the expected returns associated with

the factors. The CAPM goes further, putting some discipline and consistency into the

process of assigning expected returns.

There are many ways to build APT models. The arbitrary nature of the APT leaves

enormous room for creativity in implementation than CAPM and FF3F. Two equally

well-informed scholars working independently will not come up with similar

implications. In addition, structural models postulate some relationships between

specific variables. The variables can be macroeconomics, fundamental or market

related. All types of variables can be used in one model without any complication.

Practitioners tend to prefer the structural models, since these models allow them to

connect the factors with specific variables and therefore link their investment

experience and intuition to the model.

Finally, academics build APT models very frequently to test various hypotheses about

market efficiency, the efficacy of the CAPM, etc. and tend to prefer the purely

statistical models, since they can avoid putting their prejudgments into the model.

Page 64: Phd Thesis

48

2.7 Economic Crises and Stock Market Crashes

Stock markets are considered as the first hit element of economic crises in any

economy. Due to the uncertainty created by the crisis environment there is a high

volatility in the stock markets in which crisis is directly affected. In a volatile

environment in the market the stock returns also show highly fluctuating patterns.

This irregular behavior in the returns directly affects the future predictions of stock

returns made with the pricing models.

Therefore, it is essentially beneficial to review the crises that have occurred in the

recent past in the main context of this analytical study. Apparently there is a close

relationship between the asset pricing volatility and the stock market crises. Thus, it is

vital to incorporate the previous literature relating to the market crises in the world,

with special focus on the US stock market and emerging stock markets. The rest of

the section deals with the explanation of the nature of the economic market crises and

the stock market crash. This section also describes the link between stock market

volatility and economic crises.

2.7.1 General overview of Economic Crisis and Stock Market Crashes

A stock market crash is a sudden dramatic decline of stock prices across a significant

cross section of a stock market. Crashes are driven by panic, as much as by

underlying economic factors. They often follow speculative stock market bubbles.

Stock market crashes are in fact a social phenomena, where external economic events

combines with crowd behavior and psychology in a positive feedback loop, where

selling by some market participants drives more market participants to sell. Generally

speaking, crashes usually occur under the following conditions.

A prolonged period of rising stock prices and excessive economic optimism, a market

where price to Earnings ratios exceed long-term averages, with the extensive use of

margin debt and leverage by market participants. There is no numerically specific

definition of a crash, but the term commonly applies to steep double-digit percentage

losses in a stock market index over a period of several days. Crashes are often

distinguished from bear markets by panic selling and abrupt, dramatic price declines.

Page 65: Phd Thesis

49

Bear markets are period of decline stock market prices that are measured in month or

years. While crashes are often associated with bear markets, they do not necessarily

go hand in hand. The crash of 1987, for example, did not lead to a bear market.

Likewise, the Japanese Nikkei bear market of the 1990s occurred over several years

without any notable crashes. The term crisis is applied broadly to a variety of

situations in which some institutions or assets suddenly lose a large part of their value.

There are namely 4 types of crisis: first, banking crisis; secondly speculative bubbles

and crashes; thirdly international financial crisis; and fourthly wider economic crisis.

In the 19th

and early 20th

centuries, many financial crises were associated with

banking panics and many recessions coincided with these panics. Other situations that

are often called financial crisis include stock market crashes and the bursting of other

financial bubbles, currency crises and sovereign defaults.

Sort list of major financial crises:

1910- Shanghai rubber stock market crisis

1930s- The Great Depression - the largest and most important economic depression in

the 20th

century.

1973-oil crisis-oil prices soared, causing the 1973-1974 stock market crash.

1980s-Latin American debt crisis-beginning in Mexico

1987-Black Monday (1987)-the largest one-day percentage decline in stock market

history

1989-91-United States Savings and Loan crisis

1990s - Japanese asset pricing collapsed

1992-93-Black Wednesday speculative attacks on currencies in the European

Exchange Rate Mechanism

Page 66: Phd Thesis

50

1994-95- 1994 economic crisis in Mexico –speculative attack and default on Mexican

debt

1997-98-1997 Asian Financial Crisis – devaluations and banking crisis across Asia

1999-2002- Argentine economic crisis- originated with the declining of GDP

2008- up to date- Subprime Mortgage Crisis in US.

Many economists have offered theories about how financial crises develop and how

they could be prevented. There is little consensus, however, and financial crises are

still a regular occurrence around the world.

2.7.2 Information effect on Crisis

Galbraith (2009) and Palma (1998) argue that the stock market was inherently

unstable and anything could have shattered the public‘s confidence. One of the major

causes of the crisis is the asymmetric information. The major barrier to the financial

system to perform its role is the asymmetric information, the fact that one party to a

financial contract does not have the same information as the other party, which results

in moral hazard and adverse selection problems.

Mishkin (1998), Mishkin and Schmidt-Hebbel (2001) defines a financial crisis to be a

non liner disruption to financial markets in which the asymmetric information

problems of adverse selection and morel hazard become much worse. Under these

conditions financial markets are no longer able to channel funds efficiently to those

who have the most productive investment opportunities. In most financial crises, the

key factor that causes asymmetric information problems to worsen and launch a

financial crisis is a deterioration of balance sheets, particularly those in the financial

sector. Presence of asymmetric information in a stock market directly affects the

pricing patterns of the stocks in the market. These differences in the behavioral

patterns of the stock prices in the stock market will largely influence the volatility of

stock prices traded in the stock exchange.

Page 67: Phd Thesis

51

Thus, the predictions made with the assets pricing models such as CAPM and FF3F

will become invalid under a high volatile situation induced by the asymmetric

information in the market place. On the other hand, the assumptions made during the

construction of the above models will no longer be valid under market crisis situation.

For example, the CAPM applies in the markets with the assumption that an asset with

zero beta yields the risk free rate. But during high volatile situation there will be

higher standard deviation of stock returns which create high risky environment in the

stock market. If it is true there cannot be zero beta stocks in the market. Therefore, to

come to a universally valid conclusion, the models should be tested separately for

high and low volatile periods in the market. In other worlds the sample periods should

be taken as crisis and non crisis periods in the stock markets.

2.7.3 Historical Empirical Evidence of Market Crisis

The crisis literature has mostly focused on currency crisis and the U.S. stock market

crash of 1987, and examined issues related to the causes of crisis, price changes

surrounding the crisis, international market linkages, contagion, and changes in

benefits to international diversification. The U.S. stock market crash of October 1987

inspired several studies on assets pricing. Fama and French (1989) Roll (1989) seek

to explain the crash in term of shifts in fundamental factors, such as downward

revisions in expectations about global economic activity, or higher equilibrium

required returns. In contrast, Seyhun (1990) concludes, based on the behavior of

corporate insiders, that investor overreaction was an important part of the crash. His

evidence showed that, while the crash was a surprise to insiders, they bought stocks in

record numbers immediately after the crash, especially those stocks which had

declined the most, and these stocks had large positive returns in 1988. Van Norden

(1996) uses regime-switching regressions to conclude that the degree of prior market

overreactions explain subsequent U.S. stock market crashes for the period 1926-89.

The U.S. stock market crash inspired several studies on the international links

between stock markets. In early literature, Solnik (1974) showed that international

investments are beneficial for U.S. investors since correlations between U.S. and non-

U.S. markets are low. Bennett and Kelleher (1988) find that the transmission of stock

Page 68: Phd Thesis

52

price volatility between markets was greater than normal during the crash, and that

periods of high daily volatility are associated with high correlations between markets.

Neumark, Tinsley and Tosini (1991) show that correlations between stock market

prices of different countries increase during times of extreme volatility and become

small or close to zero during more normal periods and suggest that transactions costs

may explain this pattern of asymmetric correlations.

There is a large array of literature on international currency crisis. One strand of this

literature seeks to develop early warning signals of exchange rate crisis. Masson

(1999) reviewed the results of selected studies on currency crisis and identified 103

crisis indicators. A second strand of the currency literature examines the issue of

currency contagion. The current study attempts to examine the behavior of the

portfolios sorted by market capitalization and BE/ME under the most recent crisis

periods. However, this study will not focus on the indicators of most recent market

crisis. It focuses on the stock price behavior and validity of the CAPM and FF3F as a

result of crisis indicators mentioned above.

2.7.4 Evidences on Volatility, Crisis and other Events

It is worthwhile to study some historical tests on the volatility of stock markets as the

stock market volatility and crises are occurring at the same time in the market place

in most of the situations. Historically, statistical literature on changes of variance

started with Hsu, Miller and Wichern (1974) who unearth this formulation as an

alternative to the Pareto distribution model stock returns. There are many works

aimed at identifying the point of change in a data set of independent random variables

(Hinkley 1971; Smith 1975; Menzefricke 1981).

Booth and Smith (1992) used the Bayes ratio to decide whether a series presents a

single change of variance at an unknown point. For example (1977; Hsu 1979; Hsu

1982) studied the detection of the variance shift at an unknown point in a sequence of

independent observations, focusing on the detection of points of change one at a time

because of the computational burden involved in looking for several points change

simultaneously. Worsley (1986) used maximum likelihood methods to test a change

in a mean for a sequence of independent exponential family random variables, to

Page 69: Phd Thesis

53

estimate the change point and to give confidence regions. His work focused on

finding one change point at a time.

For autocorrelated, observations Hsu, Miller et al. (1974) studied an autoregressive

model of order one, having a sudden variance change at an unknown point. Abraham

and Abraham and Wei (1984) used a Baufays and Rasson (1985) and estimated the

variances and the points of change of maximum likelihood. Tsay (1988) discussed

autoregressive moving average models, allowing for outliers and variance changes

and proposed a scheme for finding the point of variance change of maximum

likelihood. According to Dayong, David and Marco (2005) several factors can be

attributed for the volatility change of stock markets. First, the prevailing regulation

rules are important for the volatility change. They further conclude that tight

regulation in the market leads to the decline of the volatility in the market. Secondly,

liquidity and the economic environments equally influence the volatility change in the

stock markets.

The link between volatility and crisis is a currently growing phenomenon in the area

of financial economic and in the contemporary business dialogue in the world.

Apparently it seems that there is a positive relationship between volatility and world

prominent crisis in the world economies. Some argue that social, political and

economic events cause the volatility in the stock markets. According to Aggarwal,

Inclan and Ricardo (1995) the high volatility of emerging markets is marked by

frequent sudden changes in variance. The periods with high volatility are found to be

associated with important events in each country, rather than global events. The

October 1987 crisis is the only global event in the past decade that significantly

increased volatility in several markets. Aggarwal‘s argument was re-confirmed by

Bekaert and Campbell (1997a) and (1997), who concludes that on average the

proportion of variance attributable to world factors is quite small for emerging

markets. Bailey and Chung (1995) find that important political events tend to be

associated with sudden change in volatility.

Page 70: Phd Thesis

54

2.7.5 Main Causes of Volatility of Stock Returns

Various economic and firm specific factors are driving forces of stock market crisis.

There is also reason to believe that stock return volatility is related to the level of

economic activity prevailing in the economy. For example, if firms have large fixed

costs, net profits will fall faster than revenues if demand falls. This often called

operating leverage. Stock market volatility is related to the general health of the

economy. One interpretation of this evidence is that it is caused by financial leverage.

Stock prices are a leading indicator, so stock prices fall before and during recessions.

Thus, leverage increases during recessions, causing an increase in the volatility of

levered stocks. Apart from these factors there can be other factors such as systematic

(global oil pieces changes, inflation shocks etc.) and unsystematic (company specific

and sector specific factors) factors that influence the stock market volatility. Thus,

there is a close relationship between stock market volatility and economic crisis.

2.8 Patterns and gaps in the empirical literature

This section attempts to organize the empirical literature looked into so far in this

chapter in a bid to identify any gaps therein. This analysis involves looking into the

vast empirical literature which uses the CAPM and the FF3F, as well as empirical

literature on stock market crisis. Chapter 1 outlined that the present study is focused

on the testing of CAPM and FF3F under a market turmoil condition; therefore, the

present section is important to prove the originality of this thesis. This analysis of

literature is not meant to be exhaustive or representative. Instead, the attempted here

is to establish broad trends and patters in the literature using a very small sample of

papers.

Figure 2.5 demonstrates the analysis of the selected empirical studies on CAPM,

FF3F and crisis literature using a Venn diagram. This enables a clear identification of

interactions across these three strands of the literature. Obviously the interactions are

identified in the overlapping section in the diagram. The figure attempts to categorize

a sample of 42 studies selected randomly, but in way that both developed and

Page 71: Phd Thesis

55

emerging market studies are included. The bold fonts represent the studies of

developed markets.

Page 72: Phd Thesis

56

Figure 2.5: Analysis of empirical literature involving asset pricing and stock market crises. The

Bold fonts identify the developed market

Crisis Literature

CAPMFF3F

5 6 7 32 10 11

12 13 14

25 26 29

31 36

35 15 16

20 22 24

28 30 3334 27

1 2 3 8 9

17 18 19

38 23

1. Grout (2006)

2. Abdelghany (2005)

3. Lean (2007)

4. Fama (1989)

5. Groenewold (1999)

6. Gonzalez (2001)

7. Devis (1997)

8. Bartholdy (2005)

9. Bartholdy (2003)

10. Mackenzie (2000)

11. Bossaerts (2002)

12. Fletcher (2005)

13. Bossaerts (2002)

14. Gencay (2005)

15. Fuerst (2006)

16. Tai (2003)

17. Mullins (1982)

18. Chou (2010)

19. Carhart (1997)

20. Norden (1996)

21. Roll (1989)

22. Nimal (1997)

23. Fama and French (1996)

24. Fama and French (1992)

25. Ross (1977)

26. Keim (1986)

27. Fama (1993)

28. Fama (1995)

29. Jagannathan (1996)

30. Jensen (1997)

31. Nicolaas (1979)

32. Pereiro (2006)

33. Drew (2003)

34. Charitou (2004)

35. Iqbal (2007)

36. Samarakoon (1997)

37. Sehhum (1990)

38. Wai (2005)

39. Solnik (1974)

40. Bennett (1988)

41. Porter (2003)

42. Stiglitz (1990)

4 21 41

40 39 37

20 42

Current Study

Page 73: Phd Thesis

57

In Figure 2.5 out of the 42 studies 26 are from developed markets, while the balance

(16 studies) is from emerging markets. 24 studies test the CAPM, out of which 15 are

for developed markets. Similarly 21 studies are about FF3F, out of which 8 are for

developed markets. The overlapping area (except the area of crisis literature) shows

10 studies focused on both models and 7 studies are in developed markets. The

studies available on crisis periods in stock markets are 8 and out of that 4 are related

to the developed markets. Among the previous studies reviewed by the investigator in

the context of this chapter, there were some studies that investigated both CAPM and

FF3F which is shown in the overlapping area of the diagrams that represent CAPM

and FF3F.

It can be noticed that a significant volume of empirical studies have been conducted

on the CAPM and the FF3, but none of these address the issue of the impact of stock

market crisis on the models. It is interesting to note that no single study on CAPM and

FF3F is found under the crisis setting in the empirical studies previously undertaken

by the researchers. The shaded area in Figure 2.5 is the literature gap identified in the

analysis in this section. The current study aims to fill this gap and straddles all three

study areas in the figure as pointed out by the arrow.

2.9 Summary and Conclusion

This chapter attempted to review and incorporate some important theories and

concepts that led to the emergence of so called (CAPM, FF3F) asset pricing models.

Among the literature that preceded the CAPM, the contribution made by Tobin (1958)

and Markowitz (1952) is pivotal for the development/emergence of the CAPM. The

CAPM itself is the outcome of the work of three eminent scholars—Sharpe (1964),

Lintner (1965), and Black (1972). However, as discussed in the chapter later on some

empirical studies started questioning the validity of the model in the 1970s when the

various CAPM anomalies were identified. The anomalies such as January effect, size

effect and momentum effect featured prominently in the 1980s. The chapter also

shows that questions about the validity of the CAPM have led to the emergence of

FF3F due to Fama and French (1993). A large volume of empirical work is available

for the CAPM and for the FF3F in developed and emerging markets. It is also

Page 74: Phd Thesis

58

understood in the review of crisis literature that the world economic crises and stock

market crashes had a significant impact on the predictions made by these two models.

The analysis of empirical literature on CAPM, FF3F and stock market crises revealed

a gap which this work purports to fill.

Page 75: Phd Thesis

59

Chapter 3

Data and Methodology

3.1 Introduction

Conducting stock market research in developing country contexts poses particular

challenges that researchers do not have to face in developed country contexts. As

illustrated in the previous chapters, a key contribution of this research is the way it

overcomes these challenges. The present chapter discusses, in detail, aspects of the

data and the methodology which provided useful solutions to these challenges.

The main focus of this work is using the popular CAPM and FF3F asset pricing

models in the Sri Lankan context. Therefore, any discussion of methodology would

have to discuss these models. In addition, the application of the FF3F to the CSE

makes it necessary to manually create multiple portfolios using price information of

stocks traded in the CSE. This is a long and arduous process as some of the data are

not in digital form or unavailable. Thus, much of the manual data processing backed

by innovative programming skills was necessary to make this possible. This chapter

elaborates on this process in detail.

Another key methodological distinction of this work is how it segmented the final

outcome of the applications of the models into crisis and non-crisis periods. This was

achieved by objectively identifying volatility thresholds and then defining periods

where volatility was high and low. The former was defined as crisis periods; the latter

as non-crisis periods. This distinction was made using Cumulative Sums of Squares

(CSS) method for the detection of changes in variance due to Inclan and Tiao (1994).

This chapter devotes much time for the application of the CSS test for the Sri Lankan

and the US market data as this information is critical to achieve the main aim of this

research.

The rest of this chapter is organized as follow. This section is followed by Section 3.2

which discusses the CAPM and issues related to its implementation. Section 3.3

derives the FF3F and examines various methodological issues of the model. Section

Page 76: Phd Thesis

60

3.4 introduces the data used in this study. The penultimate section introduces the

mechanics of implementing Inclan and Tiao (1994) methods to identify the crisis

periods in Sri Lanka and the US. The final section summarizes the chapter and

provides some concluding remarks.

3.2 The Capital Assets Pricing Model (CAPM)

As explained in Chapter 2, the CAPM can be used to model the theoretical

relationship between risks and expected return of individual stocks or a portfolio of

stocks. The present work primarily uses it on a number of portfolios created for the

purpose of testing the FF3F. As both CAPM and FF3F have been applied to the same

portfolios within this work it can be used to compare predictive capacities of these

two models. As such it is important to understand the version of CAPM used herein.

This study applies the original CAPM developed by Sharpe, Linter and Black for the

six portfolios constructed here (Sharpe 1964; Lintner 1965; Black 1972). Application

of CAPM for the portfolios is consistent with researchers such as Blume (1970)Friend

and Blume (1973) and Black, Jensen and Scholes (1972) .The model used in this work

is:

fmpffp RRERRRE )( (3.1)

where, Rp, Rf and Rm are return on the portfolio, the risk free return and the market

return. In addition, βp is the systematic risk given by 2, mmp RRCov and E(.) is the

expectations operation.

The standard method of implementing (3.1) and estimating βp therein is to regress

historical returns of a portfolio in excess of the risk free rate (Rp-Rf) against the excess

return on the market (Rm-Rf). Therefore, to implement CAPM for the various

portfolios from Sri Lanka and the US, this thesis estimates the equation:

tptftmpptftp RRRR ,,,,, (3.2)

Page 77: Phd Thesis

61

Where Rf,t for each country is approximated by the respective three month weekly

treasury bill rate and Rm,t is approximated by weekly returns in the CSE and the

NYSE. In addition, αp is the intercept and εp,t is the residual term of this model which

is assumed to have properties necessary to estimate the model using ordinary least

square (OLS) method.

This research organizes the results of OLS estimation of (3.2) according to whether

the portfolios consist of firms with high capitalization (big portfolio) or firms with

low capitalization (small portfolio) and whether the data relates to a crisis period or

not. Furthermore the result, particularly the estimated βp‘s is used herein to illustrate

the relative safety of the portfolios. In addition, the model estimates can be used to

construct a performance index (PI) for each of the portfolios considered here

introduced by Sharpe (1966). Chapters 4 and 5 present the results of this empirical

work for Sri Lanka and the US respectively.

The applicability or the relevance of the CAPM is tested here using statistical

significance of βp. This is done by using the following hypothesis test where Ho: β = 0

against H1: β ≠ 0.

3.3 The Fama and French 3 Factor (FF3F) Model

As explained in Chapter 2 FF3F is developed by Fama and French (1992) to capture

the factors that are not captured (size and BE/ME) by the CAPM. Thus, FF3F states

that the expected return on a risky portfolio in excess of the risk free rate is explained

by three factors: (i) the excess return on the market portfolio (MKT), (ii) the

difference between the return on a portfolio covering small-size stocks and the return

on a portfolio covering large-size stocks, commonly referred to as SMB (small minus

big); and (iii) the difference between the return on a portfolio of high BE/ME stocks

and the return on a portfolio of low BE/ME stocks, commonly referred to as HML

(high minus low). Thus, according to FF3F the expected excess return on a

portfolio p can be written as:

)()()( HMLEhSMBEsMKTRRE pptpfP (3.3)

Page 78: Phd Thesis

62

The time series implementation of the above model is (Fama and French 1996: 56):

tptptptpptftp HMLhSMBsMKTRR ,,, (3.4)

Where αp, βp, ps and ph are the estimated coefficients and tp, is an error term

satisfying all the conditions necessary for the OLS estimation of the equation. Notice

that the model in (3.2) is nested within (3.4). This nested nature of the two models

mean that the condition sp=hp=0 if satisfied for (3.4) would imply that the CAPM

specification fits the data better than the FF3F specification. Thus a main hypothesis

tested using the FF3F estimation in this work is H0: sp=hp=0 against H1: sp≠0 or hp≠0.

Apart from the main test of FF3F this study additionally tests two things; first, the

explanatory power of SMB and HML in the model for the crisis and non crisis

periods. The second is the testing sensitivity of the model to January seasonal effect.

3.4 Data preparation

The previous two sections, while introducing the empirical models used in this work,

also highlighted the important part played by the weekly returns data on the six

portfolios. The formation of these portfolios from scratch, i.e. from weekly stock

prices of constituent listed companies, is a key contribution of this work. The present

section, therefore, outlines the important steps in the formation of these weekly

portfolio returns. The processes involved in the formation of portfolios are identical

for Sri Lanka and the US. The only difference being that for Sri Lanka the process,

including all the steps, had to be mostly manually implemented. In the rest of this

section the portfolio preparation is organized in two subsections: one explaining the

generic data preparation steps and the other looking into the peculiarities encountered

in the case of Sri Lanka arising primarily out of the manual nature of the work. In

addition, the section also looks at the creation of two new variables (factors) from the

six portfolios. These two variables are factors to be used in the implementation of the

FF3F.

Page 79: Phd Thesis

63

3.4.1 The generic description of portfolio creation

This subsection identifies the steps that were followed when preparing the weekly

returns of the six portfolios. The steps discussed here are commonly followed for the

case of Sri Lanka, as well as for the US. Here we identify two sets of procedures. The

first deals with the selection of stocks to various portfolios. The second set of

procedures deal with calculating weekly returns for these portfolios.

Procedure 1

Step 1.1: Obtain market capitalization data for all listed stocks in the respective

market for a selected year.

Step 1.2: Sort the stocks according to market capitalization and groups them into

categories of small and big capitalizations. This is done by first sorting and then

dividing the companies at the median capitalization value. The resulting two groups

are as at end of June, which is when the year end financial statements can be expected

to be available to the public.

Step 1.3: Calculate BE/ME ratio for all companies for the year. The data, especially

for the calculation of the book value, can be obtained from the annual published

financial statements. The book value is calculated as book value of shareholders

equity, plus balance sheet differed taxes and investment tax credit (if available),

minus book value of preferred stocks. And the market value is taken as at the date of

publication of annual reports. Screen out all negative BE/ME companies before

moving on to the next step (Fama and French 1996: 58).

Step 1.4: Sort each of the big and small portfolios into three sub portfolios according

to the BE/ME ratios. The subgroups are based on the 30th

and 70th

percentile of the

stock market. This yields six size-BE/ME portfolios, identified using the acronyms

SL, SM, SH, BL, BM, and BH. For instance SL stands for ―[S]mall capitalized stocks

with [L]ow BE/ME ratio‖.

Page 80: Phd Thesis

64

Step 1.5: Repeat Steps 1.1 through Step 1.4 for all years.

The above stated Procedure 1 generates a database of stocks to be represented each

year for all of the six portfolios. After accomplishing this it is necessary to calculate

the weekly returns for these portfolios by following Procedure 2.

Procedure 2

Step 2.1: Select a year.

Step 2.2: Select one of the portfolios in the selected year and obtained weekly price

data for them (portfolios) during the selected year (Step 2.1)

Step 2.3: Calculate weekly stock returns from the price data.

Step 2.4: Calculate value weighted return for the selected portfolio (Step 2.2) for the

selected year (Step 2.1).

Step 2.5: Compute the weekly return series for the selected year (Step 2.1) for all of

the six portfolios by repeating Step 2.2 through Step 2.4.

Step 2.6: Repeat Step 2.1 through Step 2.5 and generate the weekly return series for

the six portfolios for the remaining years.

3.4.2 The formation of the FF3F portfolios: the Sri Lankan peculiarities

While the steps outlined in the previous subsection was adhered to in both stock

markets studied here, the research had to manually implement all eleven steps for the

Sri Lankan case; for the US the weekly data for the six portfolios was available to

download. This subsection outlines the peculiarities encountered while implementing

the above steps for the CSE in Sri Lanka. The documentation of these peculiarities is

important not only for future research in Sri Lanka, but also for other emerging

markets in the world, as most of the material covered here and highlighted as

problematic for research in the CSE, are also commonly found in the wider realm of

global emerging markets.

Page 81: Phd Thesis

65

Steps 1.1 and 1.2 were straight forward to implement as market capitalization data

that was available from the CD of data library issued by the CSE (hereinafter CSE

database). However, there were some complications arising from new listings, de-

listings, and re-listing of companies. This is probably more problematic in the CSE

because these dynamics and changes in market composition are large, relative to the

size of the market. The resulting year-on-year change in the total number of

companies in the CSE is quite large. Additionally, this is also reflected in the

composition of the portfolios. For instance, a company what was small-cap in one

year could appear in the big-cap category in the next year.

Step 1.3 where the BE/ME ratios were calculated for all the companies was

particularly challenging because the book equity or the book value is not given in

digital form in the CSE database. Instead, the relevant information has to be manually

extracted from the Handbook of Listed Companies published by the CSE and used to

calculate the BE values. The researcher used the handbook for 2008 to obtain

necessary data. The book values were calculated manually for all the companies in the

CSE for 10 years. This task was made even more difficult by inconsistencies,

omissions, errors, etc. in reporting in the handbook. Specific issues included

unreported capital structure, inaccuracy of reserve recognition and unclear reporting

of differed taxes and preferred dividends. These issues were solved by referring to

company annual reports.

The next problem in implementing Step 1.3 for Sri Lanka was matching the book

equity (BE) with the corresponding market equity (ME) to calculate BE/ME ratios for

the companies. This was a problem because the two came from two sources: book

equity as explained earlier came from the Handbook, whereas the market equity came

from the CSE database. This meant that the company codes/names were either

differently written across the sources or not available at all. For instance, the company

name ―ACME‖ in the CSE database appeared as ―ACME PRINTING &

PACKAGING LTD‖ in the Handbook. Thus, matching the book equity of a company

for the particular year with the corresponding market equity could not be achieved

easily using the available packages; for example, MS Excel. And the alternative of

doing this manually for hundreds of companies for 10 years was not feasible and was

Page 82: Phd Thesis

66

highly prone to human errors. Therefore, a Visual Basic (VB) program attached in

Appendix C was used for this purpose. The program basically aligned the ME values

and BE values for all companies in a given year. After repeating it for all years it

yielded the companies to be included in each of the six portfolios for each of the ten

year.

The calculation of portfolio returns as a value weighted average of weekly company

returns in the portfolios and the case of CSE was difficult for two reasons. Firstly, the

CSE database had only monthly and daily prices at the company level, but not weekly

prices. Thus the researcher had to either prepare weekly data out of the daily data or

look for another source where the weekly data was available. The calculation from

daily data was difficult to achieve because of the issue of holidays (Sri Lanka had a

notoriously high number of public holidays in some years exceeding 33). Thus,

investigator opted to download the company level weekly price data from the

Metastock data base maintained by a UK based firm (http://www.equis.com/).

Ultimately weekly data was obtained spending about seven days (it took 3-5 minutes

to download data of one company for a year) to download data of nearly 240

companies from 1999 to 2008.

3.4.3 The creation or generation of data for additional risk factors

The FF3F‘s main contention is that in addition to the market factor, there are other

risk factors that determine pricing. The model as applied here looks at two such

factors acronymed SMB (Small Minus Big) and HML (High Minus Low). This

research used the method commonly used in the literature to calculate these from the

six portfolio return series calculated in Subsection 3.4.2. For instance, SMB is the

difference, each week, between the average of the returns on the three small stock

portfolios and the average of the returns on the three big-stock portfolios.

SMB = 1/3 (SL + SM + SH) – 1/3 (BL + BM + BH) (3.5)

HML is the difference between the average returns of the returns on the two high-

BE/ME portfolios and the average of the returns on the two low-BE/ME portfolios.

HML = 1/2 (SL + BL) – 1/2 (SH + BH) (3.6)

Page 83: Phd Thesis

67

3.5 The Data

This section presents the time series plots and the time series properties of the weekly

data used in this work. The various steps involved in the preparation of this data were

explained in the previous section. Understanding time series properties of the data is

an essential first step before venturing to run regressions based on this data. This is

done firstly by examining the time series plots of the main series which reveals certain

properties that can be picked up visually. The plots for the six portfolios and the

market in each of the countries are included here. However, as such visual

explorations are not sufficient, the section attempts to examine basic distributional

properties of the data used here, including the portfolios as well as the factors

examined here. In addition, the section also analyses rudimentary statistics to

construct a basic understanding of interlinks among the key portfolios used here.

3.5.1 Sri Lankan stock market data

As previously mentioned, this research uses weekly price data for companies listed in

the CSE, annual book equity values for the same companies, weekly returns based on

the aggregate market index (ASPI) in the CSE and weekly data for 90 day treasury

bill rate from the CBSL, to calculate weekly data for six portfolios in line with the

FF3F. CBSL securities are known to have very low, even zero, default risk which

makes it a very good proxy for the risk free rate. For instance it is rated to be even

lower than the default risk of BRIC countries. 11

The six portfolio returns for Sri Lanka were generated for a ten year period starting

from the first week of 1999 to the last week of 2008. Section 3.4 described this

process in detail. Excess returns on the portfolios are then calculated as the

continuously compounded return in excess of the chosen proxy for the unobservable

riskless return which for the purpose of this study was the continuously compounded

return to a T-Bill position held for one week. The resulting excess return series for the

six portfolio are plotted in Figure 3.1. For clarity and comparison purposes the ASPI

11 Conference for University Lecturers -14 May 2011 Central Bank of Sri Lanka.

Page 84: Phd Thesis

68

weekly market excess return series is also plotted there. The six FF3F portfolios are

identified in the figure as SL, SM, SH, BL, BM, and BH and the weekly market

returns as MKT. This is slightly different to the way the portfolio acronyms were first

introduced in Subsection 3.4.1, namely in the first encounter the acronyms were used

to denote portfolio returns and not excess returns.

Figure 3.1 illustrates that the FF3F portfolios for the CSE, as well as MKT, are all

stationary about the value of zero. As seen in these plots, the excess returns data

exhibit volatility clustering; large (small) shocks, of either sign tend to follow large

(small) shocks. This phenomenon in returns is associated with time varying

conditional variance first identified by Engle (1982). There is visual evidence that

periods of high volatility are not common across all portfolios. It is possible that this

is a phenomenon found only in developing country stock markets in anticipation

Page 85: Phd Thesis

69

Figure 3.1: Weekly time series plots of excess return of the six portfolios and the market for the

CSE. Though only the bottom panel identifies the first week of each year in its horizontal axis the

axis can be used for other panels as well.

-1.5-1.0-0.50.00.51.01.52.0

1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008

SL

-1.5

-1.0

-0.5

0.0

0.5

1.0

1.5

2.0

1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008

SM

-2.0-1.00.01.02.03.04.05.06.0

1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008

SH

-2.0-1.00.01.02.03.04.05.0

1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008

BL

-1.5-1.0-0.50.00.51.01.52.02.5

1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008

BM

-2.0

-1.0

0.0

1.0

2.0

3.0

4.0

1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008

BH

-0.3

-0.2

-0.1

0.0

0.1

0.2

0.3

1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008

MK

T

Page 86: Phd Thesis

70

of results in the next subsection for the US, these results are starkly different.

However, at least for the three small portfolios (SL, SM, and SH) there is some

correspondence in the periods where high volatility periods occur.

Though the visual method of examining data is a useful first step to understand the

data, it is not generally considered adequate for the purpose. That is why it is

important to look at summary statistics relating to the distributional properties of the

return series. These are tabulated in Table 3.1 which also includes statistics for the

FF3F factors used here. All of these data correspond to the period from the first week

in 1999 to the last week in 2008.

Table 3.1: Descriptive Statistics for the weekly data from the CSE (1999-2008).

variable Mean SE Mean St. Dev Skewness Kurtosis

SL 0.003 0.013 0.292 0.39 5.97

SM 0.010 0.013 0.281 0,26 5.12

SH 0.122 0.029 0.648 2.75 12.71

BL 0.045 0.022 0.488 3.46 20.23

BM 0.006 0.012 0.277 0.77 10.26

BH -0.010 0.018 0.400 1.76 13.26

MKT 0.001 0.001 0.036 0.66 6.53

SMB 6.98 0.685 14.8 0.74 1.01

HML -22.7 1.96 42.5 -1.26 -0.26

The means returns for all portfolios given in Table 3.1 are close to the value of zero.

In fact, based on the value of standard error of the mean (third column of the table) it

is clear that the means of these portfolio returns are not significantly different from

zero. This corroborates the information in Figure 3.1 which illustrates that the returns

do not consistently deviate from zero. This is evidence that the time series are

stationary. The two factors SMB and HML, on the other hand display means that are

significantly different from zero.

The standard deviations of the returns are close to zero in all the portfolios including

the market portfolio (fourth column in Table 3.1). However, much higher standard

deviations are reported for SMB and HML. Since these are two are based on extreme

Page 87: Phd Thesis

71

portfolios representing high cap and low cap investment positions the standard

deviation is higher for SMB and HML due to grouping effect. But MKT represents

the entire market portfolio and due to off-setting effect the standard deviation for

MKT is lower in comparison. SMB and HML represent company fundamentals which

may also account for the large standard deviation of these factors. Market portfolio is

an index which represents the returns of all the stocks. The mean values represent the

average return of the portfolios and the standard deviation is the degree of the

riskiness of the portfolios. Interestingly the theoretical positive relationship between

the return (approximated by the means) and the risk (approximated by the standard

deviation) is upheld for the CSE portfolios. For example, the correlation coefficient

between the SE and the Mean of the 7 portfolios is 0.7752, which is significant at the

level of 5 percent level.

The skewness measures are all greater than zero except for HML. Positive skewness

means that the returns have right skewed distribution and most values are

concentrated on left of the mean, with extreme values to the right. It is possible that

the shifting of the series caused by the deduction of Rf,t may have a role in these

skewness figure. In addition to skewnes, the majority of portfolios also report kurtosis

values above 3 which confirm that these return portfolio returns have distributions

with fatter tails than the normal distribution. The skewness and kurtosis statistics in

combination confirm that the FF3F portfolios for the CSE are all not normally

distributed.

3.5.2 The US stock market data

This subsection describes the data from the US by plotting them and analyzing their

distributional properties similar to what was achieved for the Sri Lankan case in the

previous subsection. The weekly data for the period, starting the first week in 1985 to

the last week in 2007, are used here. Figure 3.2 plots the weekly portfolio returns for

the US. The time series plots confirm the presence of volatility clustering in the US

data. However in this figure, unlike in Figure 3.1, high and low volatility clusters are

synchronized across the portfolios. For instance, the high volatility episode noted for

Page 88: Phd Thesis

72

Figure 3.2: Weekly time series plots of excess return of the six portfolios and the market for the

US. Though only the bottom panel identifies the first week of each year in its horizontal axis the

axis can be used for other panels as well.

-30

-20

-10

0

10

20

1985 1987 1989 1991 1993 1995 1997 1999 2001 2003 2005 2007

SL

-20

-15

-10

-5

0

5

10

19851986198719881989199019911992199319941995199619971998199920002001200220032004200520062007

SM

-20

-15

-10

-5

0

5

10

19851986198719881989199019911992199319941995199619971998199920002001200220032004200520062007

SH

-15

-10

-5

0

5

10

19851986198719881989199019911992199319941995199619971998199920002001200220032004200520062007

BL

-15

-10

-5

0

5

10

19851986198719881989199019911992199319941995199619971998199920002001200220032004200520062007

BM

-15

-10

-5

0

5

10

15

19851986198719881989199019911992199319941995199619971998199920002001200220032004200520062007

BH

-15

-10

-5

0

5

10

15

1985 1987 1989 1991 1993 1995 1997 1999 2001 2003 2005 2007

MK

T

Page 89: Phd Thesis

73

Table 3.2: Descriptive Statistics for the US stock market (1985-2007)

variable Mean SE Mean St. Dev Skewness Kurtosis

SL 0.073 0.079 2.74 -1.09 7.74

SM 0.182 0.058 2.01 -1.34 9.18

SH 0.201 0.056 1.96 -1.39 9.30

BL 0.155 0.064 2.24 -0.58 3.47

BM 0.161 0.056 1.97 -0.63 3.13

BH 0.167 0.055 1.91 -0.58 3.01

MKT 0.150 0.059 2.07 -0.82 5.23

SMB -0.009 0.0372 1.28 -0.42 5.74

HML 0.069 0.034 1.20 -0.54 5.86

MKT during 1999/2000 period is also seen in the rest of the portfolios. In fact even

the occasional outlier in the series seems to synchronize. It is tempting to identify this

as a developing country phenomenon as such synchronicity was not observed in the

figures for Sri Lanka. However, more research needs to be done before one comes to

such a conclusion. The rest of this subsection supplements this visual information

with distributions properties of the portfolios and the factors which will give more

insight into the characteristics and the properties of the portfolios. This information is

presented in Table 3.2.

The above table summarizes the descriptive statistics related to the US market data.

All the portfolios have yielded positive mean return for the period 1985 to 2007,

except SMB. Standard deviation of the portfolios represents the degree of risk in the

portfolio return. The portfolios SL, SM, BL can be considered as risky portfolios

(standard is higher) out of six portfolios. The skewness is negative for all the

portfolios which indicate that all the values are in the right side of the mean value.

None of the portfolio has zero or close to zero values for the skewness. All the values

of the kurtosis are also more than three. These results confirm that the assumption of

the normality is not true for the portfolios.

Page 90: Phd Thesis

74

3.5.3 Interlinks among the six portfolios and the market portfolio

The discussion about the time series plots in Figure 3.1 and Figure 3.2 alluded to a

key distinction between the plots for Sri Lanka and the US: that the former had less

interlinks among its portfolios, compared to the latter. Here the matter is taken up for

discussion again but using a more formal measure of association; namely, the

correlation coefficients. Table 3.3 summarizes the correlation matrix of portfolios and

the market series for Sri Lanka in Panel A and for the US in Panel B.

Table 3.3 formalizes the pair-wise association among the portfolios. There is a clear

distinction between Panel A which summarizes Sri Lankan portfolios and Panel B

which summarizes the US. The main distinction that can be easily picked is that more

correlation coefficients, in fact all of them, are significant in the US than in Sri Lanka.

This confirms the tentative results of the time series plots which asserted that

cross-portfolio associations are less synchronous in Sri Lanka. Not only are the

correlations significant in Panel B, but they are quite high ranging from 0.675 to

0.973.

Ten out of the twenty-one (10/21) correlation coefficients are significantly different

from zero at 5 percent level in Panel A. It is interesting that while 3/3 correlation

coefficients are significant for the three small portfolios (SL, SM, and SH), only 1/3

are significant for the case of the big portfolios (BL, BM, and BH). Interestingly there

are 5/21 correlation coefficients in Sri Lanka that are negative. However, they are not

significantly different from zero. Another notable feature of the Sri Lankan market is

that SM, SH, BL, BM and BH are all negatively (albeit insignificantly) correlated

with the market portfolio. Several reasons can be attributable for this behavior. The

negative correlation of small and big portfolios with market suggests that the investors

react opposite to the movement of market portfolio. In other words, when the market

goes up, the portfolio returns go down significantly. Also, the company specific

factors may have positive correlation with these portfolios than market due to this

behavior.

Page 91: Phd Thesis

75

Table 3.3: Pair-wise correlations for FF3F portfolios and the market

Panel A: Sri Lanka (1999-2008)

SL SM SH BL BM BH MKT

SL 1.000

SM 0.953* 1.000

SH 0.706* 0.786* 1.000

BL 0.572* 0.655* 0.828* 1.000

BM 0.953* 0.100* 0.787* 0.655* 1.000

BH 0.052 0.074 0.052 0.063 0.074 1.000

MKT 0.006 -0.006 -0.005 -0.004 -0.006 -0.026 1.000

Panel B: The US (1985-2007)

SL SM SH BL BM BH MKT

SL 1.000

SM 0.940* 1.000

SH 0.897* 0.969* 1.000

BL 0.795* 0.772* 0.732* 1.000

BM 0.722* 0.794* 0.783* 0.867* 1.000

BH 0.675* 0.756* 0.778* 0.785* 0.914* 1.000

MKT 0.854* 0.852* 0.822* 0.973* 0.923* 0.851* 1.000

*Significant at the 5 percent level

3.6 Crisis identification and Inclan and Tiao (1994)

Inclan and Tiao (1994) introduce and refine a test for the detection of multiple

changes in volatility of a time series. The test is identified as ICSS because it uses

Iterated Cumulative Sum of Squares method which is applied here for the CSE and

NYSE return series. This method is better than the other methods discussed in Section

2.7.4 of this thesis, as it can objectively identify the volatility breaks. The method

used data to reveal crisis periods without human intervention, which makes it an

objective approach. The most important merits of this method is that it can detect

change points systematically at given segment of a series and can use all the

information in the series to indicate the point of variance change. Though the test is

suitable for series with more than 200 observations it is not a problem for this study.

Thus as examined in Chapter 2, the changes in volatility in these series that were

Page 92: Phd Thesis

76

identified using the ICSS, can be mapped onto changes from crisis periods to non-

crisis periods and vice versa.

This section is organized in three subsections. Section 3.2.1 presents the centered

cumulative sum squares function, Dk, and outlines the how ICSS uses it iteratively to

identify multiple volatility breaks. The remaining two subsections illustrate the result

from using ICSS on the CSE and NYSE return series.

3.6.1 Iterated Cumulative sum of squares (ICSS) Algorithm

The ICSS algorithm according to Inclan and Tiao (1994) compares well against

alternative approaches available in the literature to detect changes in volatility. Inclan

and Tiao (1994) make this comparison using monte carlo simulation methods which

revealed that ICSS algorithm was the best for analyzing long time series with

potentially multiple change points of variance in a series. Inclan and Tiao (1994: 913)

define a long time series as on with 200 or more observations. These conditions are

satisfied for the weekly return processes that are studied here. In other words, they are

long time series with potentially multiple volatility breaks.

The present research, for reasons stated above uses the ICSS to detect structural shifts

in volatility in weekly market returns series from the CSE and the NYSE. The ICSS

mainly asserts that the variable Dk is more sensitive to the changes in volatility than

the alternatives available. Here Dk is defined as

,,...,1 , TkT

k

C

CD

T

k

k (3.7)

0with 0 TDD where

k

t

tmk RC1

2

, and Rm,t is the market return series at week t.

CT is the sum of all returns in the series and K is defined as the value of the series that

maximum Dk is attained. Thus, the ICSS tracks the changes in Dk to detect changes in

volatility. The algorithm involves several iterative steps that are followed in this

research. These steps given below closely follow the explanation by Inclan and Tiao

(1994: 916). Here the notation 21 : ttR represents 2111 ,2,1,, ,...,,, tmtmtmtm RRRR , t1>t2

Page 93: Phd Thesis

77

and notation 21 : ttRDk represents the range over which cumulative sum of squares

are sought.

Step 1. Let t1 = 1,

Step 2. Calculate TtRDk :1 . Let TtRk :* 1 be the point at which

TtRDkk :max 1 is obtained and let

TtRDtTTtM kTkt :2/1(max):( 111 1

If *:1 DTtM , where D* is the critical value, consider that there is a change point

at TtRk :* 1 and proceed to Step 2a. Critical value is D*.05 = 1.358. This was

visually tested.

Step 2a. Let t2= TtRk :* 1 . Evaluate 21 : ttRDk ; that is the centered cumulative

sum of squares are applied only to the beginning of the series up to t2. If

*: 21 DttM , then there will be a new point of change and repeat Step 2a until

*: 21 DttM , When this occurs it can be concluded that there is no evidence of

change in 21,....ttt and therefore the first point of change is 2tk first .

Step 2b. A similar search starting from the first change point found in step 1 , towards

the end of the series. Define a new value for t1: let .1]):[( 1

*

1 TtRkt Evaluate

TtRDk :1 , and repeat Step 2b until *:1 DTtM . Let 11 tK last

Step 2c. If ,arg elfirst KK then there is just one change point. The algorithm steps

there. If ,arg elfirst KK keep both values as possible change points and repeat steps 1

and 2 on the middle part of the series; that is 11 firstKt and T=Klast. Each time that

steps 1 and 2 are repeated then result can be one or two more points. Call NT the

number of change points found so far.

Page 94: Phd Thesis

78

Step 3. If there are two or more possible change points, make sure they are in

increasing order. Let cp be the vector of all the possible change points, found so far.

Define the two extreme values 00 cp and .1 TcpNT Check each possible change

point by calculating .,....1 ]),:1[( 11 Tjjk NjcpcpRD If

*,):1( 11 Dcpcpm jj then keep the point; otherwise eliminate it. The retained

points constitute the multiple volatility change points in the Rm,t series.

3.6.2 The ICSS and the periods of crisis in the CSE

When the ICSS algorithm was applied to the CSE returns it revealed several structural

changes in the volatility of the series. The aim of this subsection is to flag the

importance of these breaks and how they could be used to discern information about

crisis periods that the CSE would have experienced. Here an interesting attempt at

linking the ―objectively‖ identified crisis periods with historical crises occurrence in

the country will be attempted. For the most part this effort resulted in plausible

matches between ICSS crisis periods and country level historical crisis. Thus, the

mainpurpose of the ICSS algorithm would probably be that it allowed the

determination of exact start and end weeks of a more vaguely understood crisis

periods.

Figure 3.3 illustrates the identified crisis periods using shaded areas. The plot of the

CSE return series in Panel (a) illustrates the volatility clustering in the CSE return

series.12

It is also clear from Panel (a) that the shaded areas roughly coincide with the

more volatile periods signified by more pronounced lateral movement of the return

series. This is a consolation, as it shows that the ICSS algorithm is generating accurate

results that can be verified visually. However Panel (a) is also evidence that beyond

the approximate/rough identification of crisis periods, the visual examination of return

series is not very useful. For instance, one cannot objectively identify an exact start

and end week of a give crisis period using visual methods. This is why an algorithm

12 This phenomenon was discussed in Chapter 2.

Page 95: Phd Thesis

79

such as the ICSS is indispensable to bring in objectivity into this important step of this

research.

In Panel (b) a graph of approximate variances of the return series is presented. For the

purpose of generating this graph the variance for any given week is calculated as the

variance of the returns of the weekly returns in the preceding quarter. This is why it is

described here as a moving variance. Though the calculation of such a moving

variance is not required by the ICSS algorithm, this moving variance is useful to

illustrate the validity of the ICSS identified crisis periods. For instance in the case of

the CSE weekly returns, the ICSS identified crisis periods clearly coincides with the

high volatility of periods in Panel (b) of Figure 3.3. This is corroborated by Panel (c)

Page 96: Phd Thesis

80

Figure 3.3: The application of Inclan and Tao (1994) to the CSE return series. The periods of

high volatility thus identified are shaded in all three panels capturing different manifestations of

the CSE return series: (a) the CSE return series, (b) the quarterly moving variance of the return

series, and (c) the cumulative sum of squared return series.

-30%

-20%

-10%

0%

10%

20%

30%

1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008

(a) CSE return ser(a) CSE return series

0

0.001

0.002

0.003

0.004

0.005

0.006

0.007

0.008

1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008

(a) CSE return ser(b) CSE volatility series

0

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008

(a) CSE return ser(c) CSE cumulative sum of squred returns

Page 97: Phd Thesis

81

which graphs cumulative sum of squares of the returns which is defined as Ck in

equation (3.7). The cumulative squared returns are also an indication of the level of

volatility and Panel (c) clearly illustrates that the sharp increases in Ck coincide with

the crisis periods in the CSE.

Table 3.4 summarizes the crisis volatility break indentified in CSE and compares their

timing with the local and global economic changes. During the past periods CSE

performance was badly affected by the war and this resulted in the fluctuation of stock

prices rapidly from time as the political uncertainty that prevailed in the country

during the last decades hindered the development of the market. In addition to the

global stock market crises, these factors can also be attributed for the high volatility in

CSE during the past periods.

Table 3.4: Volatility breaks and crisis periods in the CSE

Breakpoints Timing Local/Global events

to from

128 139 2001

This is the period the Sri Lankan government held General

Election which led to a change of government. Impact of market

crash of 2000 in the US may also have affected the local market.

This impact, in combination of the resumption with hostilities

contributed to the negative GDP growth in 2001. During this

period The Cease Fire Agreement (CFA) between the GoSL and

the LTTE also came into effect.

207 253 2003/2004

This is the period Tsunami hit the Sri Lankan economy and it

badly affect the Sri Lankan stock market. In addition, the impact

of 2000-2003 crash in the US may also be reflected in the high

volatility in the CSE.

326 331 2005/2006

The resumption of the Eelam War IV coincides with this period.

This period covers the period immediately after the 2005

presidential election which heralded much change in economic

policy in the country under Mahinda Chinthana.

459 463 2008 This period represents the Current global market crisis. This crisis

badly affected the garment industry in the country.

Page 98: Phd Thesis

82

According to CSE and the Central Bank of Sri Lanka (CBSL), the market is highly

exposed to the global economy in several ways; particularly in terms of foreign direct

investments (FDI) and international trades. The ICSS procedure confirmed this

phenomenon by identifying several breakpoints in the CSE in line with the global

prominent market crises. Interestingly, in these results most of these breakpoints of

the market portfolio represent economic crisis periods that were experienced from

time to time in the world.

The volatility periods that are identified in this test satisfy the requirement of

volatility series for the asset pricing test. It identified 70 observations for the assets

pricing, a test which is approximately 1/5 of the total series of CSE. In the return

series in 3.1(a), after selecting the crisis periods other balance period of the series

from the full sample were identified as non-crisis period. In non-crisis series returns

fluctuate around zero.

3.6.3 ICSS and periods of crisis in the NYSE

Table 3.5: Volatility Breaks and Market Crashes- NYSE

Breakpoints Timing Global Crises

To From

84

105

89

106 1987

1987- Black Monday the largest one day percentage decline in

the market history

144

155

250

147

249

267

1989-1991 This period is associated with the Gulf War and United states

Savings and Loan crises

367

644

720

797

643

712

756

798

1999-2000 The market crash of 2000 which was the greatest curtailment of

assets values in American history

805

874

872

895

2001-2002

2001-2002 Argentine crisis during this crisis periods investors

shifted funds to US market from Argentine market

914

929

916

951 2003

Nasdaq 2000-2003 crash in the US that suffered a devastating

bear market

1155 1200 2007 Early periods of 2008 crisis

Page 99: Phd Thesis

83

The NYSE return series, with 1200 weekly observations, is also subjected to the ICSS

algorithm to identify the crisis periods therein. Figure 3.4 illustrates the results, with

the shaded areas highlighting the crisis periods, similar to Figure 3.3. The 27 volatility

breakpoints in the NYSE series were used to separate out the crisis periods from the

non-crisis periods. The figure is interesting as most of the volatility periods of US

market also represent the world prominent crisis periods during the period 1985 to

2007. Table 3.5 shows the breakpoints derived from the volatility test of the US

market with the corresponding variances; for example the variance relating to 84th

breakpoint is 0.58 as shown in the table.

Page 100: Phd Thesis

84

Figure 3.4: The application of ICSS to the NYSE returns series. The periods of high volatility are

shaded in the panels capturing different manifestations of the NYSE return series: (a) the NYSE

return series, (b) the quarterly moving variance of the return series, and (c) the cumulative sum

of squared return series.

-15%

-10%

-5%

0%

5%

10%

15%

1985 1987 1989 1991 1993 1995 1997 1999 2001 2003 2005 2007

(a) NYSE return series

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

1985 1987 1989 1991 1993 1995 1997 1999 2001 2003 2005 2007

(b) NYSE volatility series

0

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

1985 1987 1989 1991 1993 1995 1997 1999 2001 2003 2005 2007

(c) NYSE cumulative sum of squares series

Page 101: Phd Thesis

85

3.6.4 Descriptive statistics for crisis and non-crisis periods

Subsections 3.6.2 and 3.6.3 divided both markets studied here into two periods, as

crisis and non-crisis periods. As various econometric models will be fitted to the data

thus divided in the forthcoming chapters, it is appropriate that the data from these

periods (for both countries) be examined for their distributional characteristics and

other properties. The tools used for the purpose is similar (summary statistics and

correlations) to those used in Subsections 3.5.1 and 3.5.2 to examine the full data set,

including both crisis and non-crisis periods. It is obvious that the properties of the

data are different under high and low volatile conditions in the market.

Table 3.6: Descriptive statistics for the CSE.

Panel A: Crisis Period.

variable Mean SE Mean StDev Skewness Kurtosis

SL -0.014 0.027 0.314 -0.72 2.89

SM -0.002 0.024 0.276 -0.68 5.18

SH 0.234 0.105 1.19 5.71 47.00

BL 0.038 0.034 0.393 3.71 28.72

BM -0.010 0.022 0.254 3.72 16.26

BH -0.022 0.050 0.566 0.12 9.11

MKT 0.016 0.004 0.047 1.67 4.12

SMB 8.90 1.41 15.93 1.22 -0.53

HML -0.27 0.062 1.25 0.62 9.59

Panel B: Non Crisis Period

Variable Mean SE Mean StDev Skewness Kurtosis

SL 0.003 0.014 0.298 0.56 5.93

SM 0.007 0.014 0.287 0.38 5.27

SH 0.120 0.032 0.649 2.99 14.55

BL 0.039 0.024 0.482 3.51 21.37

BM 0.007 0.014 0.291 0.85 9.43

BH -0.011 0.018 0.364 0.90 6.44

MKT -0.008 0.001 0.030 0.15 5.43

SMB 6.69 0.735 14.74 0.75 1.33

HML -21.95 2.091 41.83 -1.28 -0.20

Page 102: Phd Thesis

86

Table 3.6 reports the distributional properties of the portfolios and the FF3F factors

for the CSE in two panels: Panel A looks at the crisis periods and Panel B the

non-crisis periods. As shown in Panel A, the mean return is not significantly different

from zero for the all six portfolios. Only MKT is statistically significant in that panel,

but that too is not economically significant. Overall the portfolio returns during crisis

periods oscillate around the value of zero. Four out of six portfolios report negative

means, but as noted above these are not statistically significant. The portfolio average

returns and SE in Panel A has a positive relationship illustrated by the correlation

coefficient of 0.8519.

Statistics in Panel B of Table 3.6 show that in the non-crisis period only BH portfolio

yields negative mean return. However, again none of the means are statistically

significant. Generally most of the portfolios on average yield a lower return during

crisis than during non-crisis: the average for portfolio return during crisis is 0.0342

and for non-crisis 0.0224. This makes sense, as high risk crisis periods need to

compensate the investor with a higher return. The risk return relations implied in

Panel B seem to be weaker than that in Panel A. The correlation coefficient for non-

crisis period is 0.8251, which is comparatively lower than that of Panel A reported in

the previous paragraph. The standard deviation is relatively similar in both periods.

However, HML has very high standard deviation during non-crisis periods. This can

be mainly attributed to the degree of exposure of this factor to crises. This also

suggests that HML is not sensitive to the crisis periods when compared with the non-

crisis periods.

Table 3.6 reports skewness and kurtosis measures for the variables from the CSE

separated according to whether they cover crisis periods or non-crisis periods. They

indicate that the distributions are not normal.

Page 103: Phd Thesis

87

Table 3.7: Descriptive statistics for the US

Panel A: Crisis Period.

variable Mean SE Mean St. Dev Skewness Kurtosis

SL -0.003 0.158 3.18 -1.63 9.95

SM 0.067 0.114 2.31 -1.82 11.57

SH 0.053 0.107 2.16 -1.73 10.50

BL 0.180 0.132 2.67 -0.70 3.07

BM 0.062 0.114 2.30 -0.54 2.45

BH 0.068 0.105 2.12 -0.48 1.82

MKT 0.118 0.121 2.45 -1.00 5.02

SMB -0.065 0.079 1.59 -0.72 6.17

HML -0.027 0.062 1.25 1.08 9.59

Panel B: Non-Crisis Period.

Variable Mean SE Mean St. Dev Skewness Kurtosis

SL 0.125 0.102 2.53 -0.45 3.66

SM 0.264 0.070 1.74 -0.95 6.97

SH 0.320 0.072 1.78 -1.26 10.6

BL 0.155 0.084 2.10 -0.41 2.77

BM 0.231 0.073 1.81 -0.66 3.62

BH 0.223 0.075 1.85 -0.63 4.28

MKT 0.172 0.077 1.91 -0.55 4.31

SMB 0.033 0.045 1.12 0.26 0.74

HML 0.131 0.051 1.27 0.2 3.08

Table 3.7 summarizes the statistics of the US data series for the crisis and non-crisis

periods. In Panel A which includes the statistics for crisis periods in the US, the mean

returns for the portfolios are positive for all the portfolios except SL and out of FF3F

factors only HML shows a negative return. None of the portfolio means are

significantly different from zero.

Panel B shows that for the non-crisis periods the portfolios, as well as the factors,

have positive means, though they are not significant. On average the means of

portfolio returns during non-crisis (0.0778) is higher than in the crisis period (0.2128).

Surprisingly the theoretical risk and return relationship seems to be violated here:

mean return and standard deviation are not changing in the same direction.

Page 104: Phd Thesis

88

The reported skewness values are negative for portfolios in both panels and some are

close to zero. The kurtosis values are ranging between 0.74 and 6.97, here also some

values are close to 3. These results indicate that the US portfolios are partially

normally distributed.

3.6.5 The correlation analysis of the crisis and non-crisis periods

Interlinks between portfolios examined in Subsection 3.5.3 was useful to understand

the distinctions between Sri Lankan and the US markets. However, since that

discussion the data had been separated into two on the basis of crisis/non-crisis. It is

appropriate that the discussion of the portfolio interlinkages extend to issue of

whether the links in question are sensitive to the crisis/non-crisis distinction. This

section looks at the prosperities and the behavior of the portfolios using pair-wise

correlation analysis.

Page 105: Phd Thesis

89

Table 3.8: Pair-wise correlations of portfolios for the crisis and non-crisis periods in the CSE

Panel A: Crisis Period

SL SM SH BL BM BH MKT

SL 1.000

SM 0.512* 1.000

SH 0.350* 0.004 1.000

BL 0.101 0.271* -0.052 1.000

BM 0.575* 0.621* 0.196 0.233 1.000

BH -0.014 0.027 -0.027 0.090 0.035 1.000

MKT 0.188 0.194 0.279* 0.078 0.147 0.234 1.000

Panel B: Non Crisis Period

SL SM SH BL BM BH MKT

SL 1.000

SM 0.336* 1.000

SH -0.040 0.005 1.000

BL 0.060 0.010 0.008 1.000

BM 0.344* 0.210* 0.031 -0.014 1.000

BH -0.008 0.010 -0.030 0.033 0.034 1.000

MKT -0.003 0.053 -0.019 -0.026 0.011 0.075 1.000

* critical value for the correlation coefficient is calculated as n1 .

Table 3.8 presents the pair wise correlation for the crisis period (Panel A) and

non-crisis period (Panel B) for CSE. Panel A shows that during crisis periods 6/21

correlation coefficients are significant. This falls to 3/21 in Panel B. If one compares

the correlation coefficients across the panels (ignoring whether they are significant), it

is clear that correlation figure in the Panel A are generally higher than the

corresponding figures in Panel B (Correlations are high for 18/21 cases in Panel A). It

can be concluded that crisis periods seem to be generating conditions that promote

interlinks in the market. This is consistent with the work of others in the literature

which show that correlations can increase during crisis settings (see Longin and

Solnik 2001; Ang and Bekaert 2002).

Page 106: Phd Thesis

90

Table 3.9: Pair-wise correlations of portfolios for the crisis and non-crisis periods in the US

Panel A: Crisis Periods

SL SM SH BL BM BH MKT

SL 1.000

SM 0.964* 1.000

SH 0.933* 0.977* 1.000

BL 0.784* 0.783* 0.753* 1.000

BM 0.719* 0.766* 0.756* 0.914* 1.000

BH 0.672* 0.720* 0.732* 0.847* 0.926* 1.000

MKT 0.851* 0.854* 0.828* 0.980* 0.941* 0.877* 1.000

Panel B: Non crisis Periods

SL SM SH BL BM BH MKT

SL 1.000

SM 0.915* 1.000

SH 0.856* 0.958* 1.000

BL 0.792* 0.760* 0.705* 1.000

BM 0.694* 0.801* 0.783* 0.821* 1.000

BH 0.645* 0.767* 0.794* 0.720* 0.896* 1.000

MKT 0.844* 0.841* 0.802* 0.970* 0.895* 0.809* 1.000

* critical value for the correlation coefficient is calculated as n1 .

Table 3.9 summarizes the inter-portfolio correlation for crisis and non-crisis periods

in the US market. It is interesting to see that all portfolios are highly correlated with

other portfolios in both periods. This usual behavior of the portfolios seen in

developed markets. In a scenario like this the investors will not be able to get the

diversification benefits as all the portfolios move in the same direction under different

conditions in the economy. However, during crisis periods (Panel A) inter-portfolio

correlation is higher than non-crisis periods. If a comparison is made between Panel A

and Panel B, out of 21 correlation pairs, 17 pairs show higher values in Panel A, than

corresponding values in Panel B. This suggests that inter-portfolio correlation

increases when the market becomes highly volatile in a crisis setting.

Page 107: Phd Thesis

91

3.7 Summary and Conclusion

Chapter 3 discusses the methodology of this research, placing much emphasis on the

formation of the portfolios used here. The key models used here, the CAPM and the

FF3F, were explained with additional notes on their empirical formulation. Since the

testing of crisis sensitively of these models is a major contribution of this thesis (see

Chapter 1) it was necessary to clearly explain how the crisis periods were identified

for the purpose. This chapter, therefore, explained in detail the ICSS algorithm due to

Incan and Tiao which is used here to identify the crises. The crisis periods are

identified in both the CSE and NYSE data. Usefully the identified crisis periods could

be given historical explanations in most cases for both countries. The chapter also

provides, with some discussion, summary statistics for the data used in this paper.

This discussion is organized by the country and by whether crises were observed for

the period.

Page 108: Phd Thesis

92

Chapter 4

Test of Pricing Models and Anomalies in Colombo Stock

Exchange

4.1 Introduction

Since the end of war in May 2009, Sri Lanka has been attracting global attention for

both good and bad reasons. The attention Sri Lanka received from international

investors is one of the positive outcomes of ending 26 years of civil conflict. In fact

much local publicity has been given for CSE intermittently registering best

performing global market status based on the total market return percentage which is

higher than anywhere in the world. This paves the path to bring in arguably the most

important chapter of this thesis that scrutinizes the performance of asset pricing

models in the CSE.

Here the methodology and the CSE data prepared and described in Chapter 3 is used

to examine the validity of the CAPM, the FF3F and the January effect for Sri Lanka:

a key, if not the main objective of this work. It must be reemphasized that a massive

amount of work at the level of data preparation and portfolio construction has already

been done even before data analysis. In addition, the analysis investigates the crisis

sensitivity of these results by implementing the CAPM and the FF3F for crisis periods

and non-crisis periods separately. Chapter 3 discusses the modalities of using the

ICSS algorithm due to Inclan and Tiao (1994) to separate crisis and non-crisis periods

in Sri Lanka.

The rest of the chapter is organized as follows. Section 4.2 explains the main features

of global emerging stock markets. Section 4.3 introduces the reader to the Sri Lankan

context, drawing special attention to the investment climate and the CSE. Section 4.5

discusses the CAPM results for Sri Lanka, followed by the FF3F results for Sri Lanka

in Section 4.5. The next section deals with the January effect for the country. Section

4.8 concludes the chapter.

Page 109: Phd Thesis

93

4.2 Main Features of Emerging stock markets

In the 1980s and first half of 1990s, the emerging markets became popular among

investors. Generally these markets were highly volatile and more risky, but yield more

returns to investors. More fund managers and brokerage firms came into these

markets to operate their businesses and despite the risk of the market pensions, funds

were invested in these markets during that period. In the arena of investment in stock

markets, new avenues of investment were generated with the liberalization of world

emerging markets and it resulted to attract more local and foreign investors to these

markets. However, the popularity of these markets was eroded with the sudden Asian

crisis that originated from Thailand in 1997. A large number of investors were

withdrawn from the worst affected markets. Countries such as Korea, Thailand and

Indonesia were badly affected by the 1997 Asian crisis.

The most dominant feature of emerging market is the ‗country effect‘ which means

that these markets are more susceptible to country specific factors unlike developed

markets.

During the past two decades globally the recognition of emerging markets has

increased rapidly. These markets have shown phenomenal growth in terms of market

capitalization. More specifically, market capitalization has increased 32 times

between 1980 and 2000. Growth in stock market liquidity as measured by trading

value has been even more striking; it has increased by more than 170 times during the

past 20 years.

4.3 Investing in Sri Lanka and the CSE

This section provides a detailed description about Sri Lanka in a bid to provide a

reasonable grounding for the reader about the country. It provides a general country

description including a socio-economic description, as well as a more focused

description about the history, operations and current status of the CSE.

Page 110: Phd Thesis

94

4.3.1 Sri Lanka: the economy in general

Sri Lanka is a South Asian island nation situated at the southern tip of India and

surrounded by the Indian Ocean. Though the economy of the country was for 26 years

overshadowed by the civil war between the Government of Sri Lanka (GoSL) and the

Tiger separatists (LTTE), there was an element of resilience in the economy which

saw economic growth averaging at about 5 percent level during this period (see). At

the turn of the last century the economy of the country under the British colonialist

was characterized by the significance of the plantations. About this time, tea had

replaced coffee as the main crop in this sector and later, since its introduction in 1905.

Additionally, rubber had also been an important contributor to the plantation sector.

Plantation history, while being important to paint the evolution of the modern

economic history of the country in general, is also important in tracing the history of

the stock market in the country.

Figure 4.1: Percentage contribution by each sector to the economy of Sri Lanka (left axis) and the

GDP growth rate (right axis). The data is from 1950 to 2009.

-2

0

2

4

6

8

10

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

19

50

19

53

19

56

19

59

19

62

19

65

19

68

19

71

19

74

19

77

19

80

19

83

19

86

19

89

19

92

19

95

19

98

20

01

20

04

20

07

20

10

GDP growth Agri Industry Service

Source: Central Bank of Sri Lanka Annual Reports (various years).

Page 111: Phd Thesis

95

Since independence in 1948, however, the contribution of the agricultural sector

(including the plantations sector) to the GDP of the country has gradually declined.

These trends are mapped in Figure 4.1 which illustrates the evolution of the economy

gradually being dominated by the services sector. Nevertheless, much of the labor

force of the country is still engaged in agriculture. In 2009 for instance agriculture

accounts for 33 percent of the total employment in the country. In the mean time the

service sector accounts for 41 percent and the industrial sector 26 percent of total

employment (CIA World Fact Book). Figure 4.1 also visually illustrates the structural

shift in 1977 characterized by the liberalization of the trade account. This regime shift

consolidates the services sector in the country which includes wholesale and retail

trade, tourism, transport, telecom, financial services. All these areas are earmarked for

exponential growth in the post-war era.

Sri Lanka now classified by the World Bank as a lower middle income country,

currently enjoys a per capita GDP of USD 2053 (CBSL, 2009). The per capita income

of the country is 3700$. The poverty rate of the people living in Sri Lanka is 22% of

the total population. The human development index is 0.740 and Sri Lanka is ranked

97 out of 177 countries and 73% enjoy basic amenities such as electricity. (Website:

International Center for Ethnic Studies). Sri Lanka's 91% literacy rate in local

languages and life expectancy of 75 years rank is well above those of India,

Bangladesh, and Pakistan. The English language ability and usage was relatively high

in past deacdes, but has declined significantly since the 1970s.

The economic situation in Sri Lanka faltered in 2009 due to the global credit crisis. In

2009 GDP grew by 3.5%, down significantly from 6% growth in 2008. Exports fell

by about 13.5%. In 2008, trade and current accounts recorded large deficits due to

high oil and commodity prices, and an unsuccessful effort by the government to

defend the Sri Lankan rupee that drained Sri Lanka‘s exchange reserves, forcing it to

turn to the International Monetary Fund (IMF) in early 2009 for assistance. Sri Lanka

depends on a strong global economy for investment and expansion of its export base,

and the global slowdown has proved to be detrimental to Sri Lankan growth. It hopes

to diversify export products and destinations to make use of the Indo-Lanka and

Page 112: Phd Thesis

96

Pakistan-Sri Lanka Free Trade Agreements and other regional and bilateral

preferential trading agreements.

4.3.2 An overview of the Colombo Stock Exchange

The commencement of Share trading in Sri Lanka is linked with the plantation

industry in the British colonial period. After the ―coffee blight‖ the British Planters

required funds to replace the coffee plantations in Sri Lanka with tea plantations. This

led to the setting up of the Colombo Share Brokers Association which commenced

trading of shares in limited liability companies in 1896. In 1985, the Colombo Stock

Exchange (CSE) was set up as a company which took over these operations from the

Colombo Shares Brokers Association.

The CSE is one of the smallest stock markets in terms of turnover, the capitalization

and the number of trades. Currently the number of companies listed in the CSE is 242.

The number of investors in the market is around 130,000. However, among these the

number of active investors who trade frequently is less than 40,000. The stocks in the

CSE are classified into 20 sectors as plantation, banking and finance, manufacturing,

tourism, etc. A full list and the number of companies in each sector at the time of

writing are given in the appendix.

The performance of the market is mainly measured with the values of All Share Price

Index (ASPI) which can be described as a crude measure of the macroeconomic

environment of the country. A plot of the ASPI during the 10 years covered in this

research is given in the top panel of Figure 4.2. The vertical axis of the graph is

measured in 100s. For example in the first week in 1999, the starting point of the

figure, the ASPI was at 583. As such the graph starts at 5.83 in an axis given in 100s.

It is obvious that the ASPI had moved approximately horizontally during the years

1999 to 2001 and had trended upward thereafter. The shaded area of the graph shows

the crisis periods identified in Chapter 3 (see Figure 3.3). The post 2001 movement of

the ASPI in both directions can be linked to important socio-political events in Sri

Lanka. For instance, the change of government in 2001, the signing of the CFA in

2002, the tsunami of 2004, the election of President Rajapakse in 2005, resumption of

Eelam War IV in 2006, are all important events. The high interest rate regime in 2008

Page 113: Phd Thesis

97

and 2009, as well as the global financial crisis, had caused the ASPI to dip in this

period. Nevertheless, the CSE has continued to attract much attention from the

investors due to the post-war peaceful environment in the country.

The movement of the ASPI also affected the four-fold investor group trading in stocks

of the 242 listed companies (in he 20 sectors) available in the CSE. The four

categories of investors are local companies, local individuals, foreign companies, and

foreign individuals. The bottom panel of Figure 4.2 illustrates the way these investor

groups contribute to market capitalization. Comparing the top and bottom graphs, one

can identify a clear pattern: that foreign participation rate generally reflects the level

of the ASPI. In other words, the higher degree of foreign involvement in the market,

will lead for higher ASPI. This is in fact a generally accepted phenomenon of the

CSE, probably reflecting the relationship between the confidence of the investors

(captured by the foreign participation level) and the market performance.

In addition to the above improvements, technological improvements and restructured

trading process has tremendously contributed to the better performance of the CSE.

The Central Depository System (CDS) introduced in 1991 became fully operational in

June 1992. The CSE has always attempted to bring in the latest technological

innovations to Sri Lanka. The small size of the market probably makes this relatively

easy for the case of Sri Lanka. The branch network of the CSE is another strategic

move of the CSE to attract more local participants to the market. Currently CSE has

opened five branches in the Inland covering important provinces. Out of branch

network, the recently opened branch in the Jaffna peninsula, (war-tone area for 26

years) will be a good opportunity for the people deprived of opportunity for investing

in CSE. These branches conduct awareness campaigns regularly for school children

and the general public, in addition to providing other advisor services. The main

objective of CES from these initiate is to increase the participation of local individuals

into the market.

Page 114: Phd Thesis

98

Figure 4.2: All Share Price Index (ASPI) and identified crisis periods for the CSE (top graph)

and the investor composition of the CSE (bottom graph). Axis in the top graph is in 100s and the

bottom one in percentages. Also top graph is derived from weekly data while the bottom one is

from annual data. Thus to make comparative sense from the two graphs they are horizontally

aligned in so that year references in the bottom graph falls between the year references in the top

graph.

0%10%20%30%

40%50%60%70%80%90%

100%

1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008

Local Companies Local Individuals

Foreign Individuals Foreign Companies

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008ts

un

am

i

Pre

s.E

lecti

on

Eela

mW

ar

IV

LT

TE

fir

st a

ir r

aid

CF

A

4.3.3 Impact of Recent Global Crisis on the CSE

The current financial crisis has affected the CSE according to the top panel of Figure

4.2. However, events that showed the downward trend quickly reversed after the end

of civil war in May 2009, a period which is not shown in the graph. In fact, the ASPI

has gone into all time high levels after the time period in the graph. For instance in

mid-2010, when this thesis was being finalized, the ASPI was nudging the 5000 level

(see the CSE website at http://www.cse.lk). So it gives a general perception that the

Page 115: Phd Thesis

99

crisis had less economic impact (in terms of the lost jobs etc.) as in some of the other

countries, due to the country having minimal interaction with financial institutions

severely hit by the global crisis. Certain sectors in the economy with strong links with

the external sector, like the apparel sector, have been more affected by the crisis than

others. However, overall the Sri Lankan economy has been resilient to the present

crisis. This has made local stock brokers very optimistic about the market. They base

this argument on the fact that foreign interest in the CSE is still intact. The

significance of foreign markets as an indicator of the performance of the CSE was

examined earlier using Figure 4.2. Generally the stock brokers would start worrying if

foreign investors and fund managers start pulling out from Sri Lanka as their profit

margin decline due to such behavior of foreign investors. However, it is not likely

with post-war euphoria in CSE.

The Sri Lankan situation examined in this section is important to understand and

appreciate the empirical results detailed in the next few sections. This empirical work

begins with the application of the CAPM to the weekly FF3F portfolios for the CSE

compiled in Chapter 3.

4.4 Test of the CAPM using the FF3F portfolios

This section presents the results of fitting the CAPM to the 6 size-BE/ME portfolios.

This is done using the time series regression of equation 3.2 explained in Chapter 3.

The present work also tests whether these results from fitting the CAPM are sensitive

to crises in the CSE. This is achieved by applying the model to crisis and non-crisis

data separately. Section 3.6 described how the data was separated for this purpose.

The estimation results are organized in Table 4.1 in three panels. Panel A, Panel B

and Panel C in the table present the results for the full period, crisis period and the

non-crisis period respectively.

Page 116: Phd Thesis

100

Table 4.1: Test of CAPM in the CSE

Rf,t is the three month treasury bill rate observed at each week. At end of June each year t, for the period

1999 to 2008 the CSE stocks are allocated in an independent sort to two groups (small or big) based on

their market capitalization (stock price into outstanding shares). Thereafter, all stocks are allocated in

an independent sort to three BE/ME groups based on the 30th

and 70th

percentile. This yields six

portfolios namely SL, SM, SH, BL, BM, and BH. Rmt is the excess weekly return of ASPI in CSE.

Regression: tptftmpptftp RRRR ,,,,,

Panel A: Full Sample Period

Dependent

Variables αp βp α(t) β(t) R

2 adj

SL 0.014 0.338 0.86 0.77 0.201

SM 0.007 0.657 0.56 1.85 0.330

SH 0.139 3.001 3.77* 2.99* 0.218

BL 0.381 -1.431 2.64* -0.37 0.200

BM 0.004 0.263 0.31 0.75 0.201

BH -0.011 0.804 -0.59 1.61 0.311

Panel B: Crisis Period

Dependent

Variables

αp βp α(t) β(t) R2 adj

SL 0.001 0.691 0.03 1.58 0.235

SM -0.004 0.773 -0.14 1.63 0.237

SH 0.211 5.671 1.26 2.39* 0.477

BL 0.127 0.895 1.31 0.65 0.206

BM -0.018 0.457 -0.70 1.23 0.221

BH -0.045 1.431 -0.861 1.35 0.354

Panel C: Non Crisis Period

Dependent

Variables

αp βp α(t) β(t) R2 adj

SL 0.014 -0.033 0.82 -0.05 0.201

SM 0.009 0.564 0.63 1.06 0.202

SH 0.116 -0.450 3.57* -0.37 0.200

BL 0.419 -3.271 2.47* -0.52 0.200

BM 0.007 0.457 -0.70 1.23 0.221

BH -0.173 1.741 -0.653 1.51 0.305

*significant at the 5 percent level

The CAPM equation 3.2, which is also identified as the security market line (SML) in

Chapter 2, estimates three important coefficients: the intercept, the slope term and the

standard error.13

The intercept is defined as the average risk-free rate for the period

being studied (see Chapter 2). Theoretically therefore, the estimated intercepts should

be equal across portfolios in a given panel. However, this condition is not seen in

13 The standard error is calculated using HAC robust statistics.

Page 117: Phd Thesis

101

most cases in the results presented here. In the above three panels (A, B and C) 4/18

intercepts are significant at the 5 percent level across three periods. All of the

significant values are positive. Out of the remaining 14/18 intercept terms, 5/18 are

negative which are theoretically wrong; for example Scholes and Williams (1977) .

However, the implications about none of these negative values are significant.

The estimated αp values can be compared vis-à-vis the risk free rates of the market. If

the market risk free rate is approximated by the average 3 month TB rate, which is

12.28 percent for the relevant period, then it becomes obvious that the estimated

intercept of the SML curve does not accurately approximate the risk-free rate of the

economy. This result is consistent with the results presented by Gonzalez (2001: 337)

for the case of the Caracas Stock Exchange, Venezuela. The calculated average

intercepts for full sample in crisis and non-crisis periods are 0.059, 0.003 and 0.065

respectively. Their proximity to the value of zero further confirms the above

conclusion.

The main coefficient in the equation 3.2 depicting the CAPM is the beta factor that

measures the systematic risk component of the portfolios (see Chapter 2). Panels A, B

and C in Table 4.1 reveal that only 2/18 beta coefficients are significant at the 5

percent level. Both these are significant betas for SH portfolios: one in the full sample

period and the other in the crisis periods. This result clearly rejects the CAPM as a

valid model for capturing the variation of portfolio returns in the CSE. It can be

interpreted as evidence that systematic risk factors such as inflation, GDP growth,

global oil prices, etc. that are not significantly influencing the fluctuation of stock

prices in the CSE.

The main reason for the rejection of the CAPM may be the inadequacy of market

index (ASPI) to capture the overall market risk. For the model to work properly it is

important that the ASPI (proxy used for market portfolio) represent the entire asset set

in the economy, including the human capital of the country. The ASPI is a value

weighted index that captures the pricing behavior of listed companies of CSE and it

does not represent all assets available for the Sri Lankan investor. This issue was

clearly stated by Roll (1977) that the inappropriate proxies immensely led to the

Page 118: Phd Thesis

102

incorrect predictions of the CAPM. He further argues that relationship between

expected returns and beta of the CAPM is just the minimum variance condition that

holds in any efficient portfolio applied to the market portfolio. If we can find a proxy

that is on the minimum variance frontier, CAPM can be used to describe differences

in expected retunes. However, in the absence of proxy which satisfies the above

condition, researches use market index as the proxy for market beta. Despite this

limitation ASPI is widely applied in CSE as the market proxy by the researchers and

professionals in the absence of alternative proxy for it in CSE.

The values of adjusted R2 as a measure of the total variance explained by the models

is not close to 1 in the results. If the model explains the variation of the stock return it

should be close to 1. Though the estimated beta is significant for SH in two occasions

as discussed earlier, even in these situations the R2 is low. Previous work, not

necessarily in the area of CAPM involving the CSE, also report low R2 values (see

Nimal 1997; Samarakoon 1997; Guneratne 2001). In conclusion, the above results

suggest that the relationship between the market and the portfolio returns is weak in

the CSE which is consistent with the findings of others in the emerging market

contexts (see Kargin 2002; Huang 2003; Salomons and Grootveld 2003) as well as in

developed market contexts (Cohen, Maier, Schwartz and Whitcomb 1986; Fama and

French 1992; Groenewold and Fraser 1997).

4.5 Test Results for the FF3F

This section uses the portfolio data constructed for the CSE in Chapter 3 to estimate

the multi factor regression in equation 3.4. The results are tabulated in Table 4.2

according to whether the full period, crisis period or the non-crisis period is being

used for the regression. But first the table presents some descriptive statistics for the

six portfolios in Panel A. The table is organized in two main columns. Each separated

according to the BE/ME categorization. The format of the table is heavily influenced

by Fama and French (1996: 59). The header rows of Table 4.2 explain what each

column stands for and the explanation is relevant for the entire table, including all

panels.

Page 119: Phd Thesis

103

Table 4.2: The FF3F results for the CSE based on weekly data (1wk 1999 to 52wk 2008).

Rf,t is the three month treasury bill rate observed at each week. At end of June each year t, for the period

1999 to 2008 the CSE stocks are allocated in an independent sort to two groups (small or big) based on

their market capitalization (stock price into outstanding shares). Thereafter, all stocks are allocated in

an independent sort to three BE/ME groups based on the 30th

and 70th

percentile. This yields six

portfolios namely SL, SM, SH, BL, BM, and BH. MKT, SMB and HML are as discussed in Chapter 3.

Book to market equity (BE/ME) portfolio

Low Medium High Low Medium High

Size

Panel A: Descriptive Statistics (Annual Averages)

BE/ME ratio The number of firms in portfolios

Small 0.013 0.010 0.041 33 45 34

Big 0.368 0.011 0.042 34 47 35

Regression: tptptptpptftp HMLhSMBsMKTRR ,,,

Panel B: Test for FF3F Full Sample Period

αp α(t)

Small 0.013 0.010 0.041 0.79 0.78 3.93*

Big 0.368 0.011 0.042 2.30* 0.81 1.80

βp β(t)

Small 0.206 0.518 2.78 0.49 1.57 2.79*

Big -0.477 0.115 1.11 -0.12 0.35 1.95

sp s(t)

Small 0.019 0.018 0.021 7.33* 9.06* 3.38*

Big -0.133 0.018 -0.002 -5.55* 8.92* -0.57

hp h(t)

Small 0.005 0.005 0.007 6.40* 8.11* 3.44*

Big -0.041 0.005 0.009 -4.92* 8.22* 7.69*

R2 adj RMSE

Small 0.305 0.356 0.237 0.301 0.261 0.79

Big 0.256 0.340 0.68 0.825 0.261 0.45

Panel C: Test for FF3F Crisis Period (Volatile)

αp α(t)

Small 0.019 0.025 0.293 0.68 0.73 1.50

Big 0.207 0.005 0.004 1.73 0.26 0.06

Β β( t)

Small 0.429 0.463 4.781 1.26 1.09 2.01*

Big 0.345 0.174 0.455 0.24 0.64 0.53

sp s(t)

Small 0.037 0.032 0.099 7.61* 5.25* 2.87*

Big 0.019 0.034 -0.008 0.93 8.55* -0.70

hp h(t)

Small 0.012 0.011 0.033 7.23* 5.21* 2.82*

Big 0.008 0.011 0.006 1.18 8.31* 1.56

R2 adj RMSE

Small 0.68 0.52 0.380 0.180 0.231 .681

Big 0.21 0.73 0.701 0.802 0.150 0.47

Page 120: Phd Thesis

104

Table 4.2: (continued)

Book to market equity (BE/ME) portfolio

Low Medium High Low Medium High

Size

Panel D: Test for FF3F Non Crisis Period (Non Volatile)

αp α (t)

Small 0.011 0.008 0.131 0.60 0.52 3.61*

Big 0.391 0.011 0.053 2.11* 0.76 2.10*

βp β (t)

Small -0.228 0.374 -0.572 -0.35 0.76 -0.48

Big -1.711 -0.059 2.161 -0.28 -0.12 2.60*

sp s(t)

Small 0.017 0.017 0.014 6.06* 7.95* 2.60*

Big -0.148 0.016 -0.002 -5.47* 7.45* -0.41

hp h(t)

Small 0.005 0.005 0.004 5.10* 6.86* 2.63*

Big -0.046 0.005 0.009 -4.88* 6.71* 7.64*

R2 adj RMSE

Small 0.286 0.341 0.318 0.351 0.266 0.647

Big 0.270 0.422 0.689 0.712 0.274 0.449

*significant at 5 percent level

Panel A reports the annual averages of the BE/ME values and average of annual

number of firms in each portfolios. Such statistics had been used by Fama and French

(1993: Table 1). The average BE/ME values reported here show that small, medium,

and high categorization is in fact correctly done. The number of firms implies that the

firms had been on average divided in order that a similar numbers fall into all 6 size-

BE/ME portfolios. These statistics based on annual averages are different in certain

ways to the statistics presented in, for example, Chapter 3. The main difference being

that in contrast to the ones presented here, the statistics in the Chapter 3 mostly

illustrate the distributional characteristics of the weekly returns.

The rest of Table 4.2 presents the regression results for the three periods that are

organized in three panels in Table 4.2: Panel B, Panel C and Panel D respectively. All

panels are vertically separated into two parts similar to the format used by Fama and

French (1996: 59). In each of Panel B to Panel D in Table 4.2 the left hand side

reports the estimated coefficients of the equation 3.4, as well as the R2 values of the

regressions for each of the portfolios. The right hand side, reports the corresponding t-

Page 121: Phd Thesis

105

values of the coefficients listed in the left hand side, as well as the Root Mean Square

Error (RMSE) of each regression.

The discussion on the estimates results are organized by the estimated coefficients.

For instance, firstly, the discussion is about the constant term, α, in all three panels:

Panel B, Panel C and Panel D. The estimates of α are all positive. Though all these 18

coefficients are positive, only five (two in Panel B and three in Panel D) are

statistically significant at the 5 percent level. Even among these 5, only three seem

economically significant. Fama and French (1996: 57) suggest that if FF3F describes

the expected returns, the regression intercepts, α, should not be significantly different

from zero. On the basis of this assertion it seems that the FF3F fits the completely

crisis periods better than the non-crisis periods. Referring back to the issue of positive

α’s which are statistically significant; it could mean that the FF3F factors are

consistently under predicting the portfolio returns.

An interesting pattern in the estimated α’s is observed across the three periods: α’s

are large (not necessarily significantly) for big size, low BE/ME portfolios (BL) and

small size, high BE/ME portfolios (SH). In all other cases the intercepts are close to

zero. The results derived from the test here are different from Drew, Naughton and

Veeraraghavan (2003) who found that none of the six alphas is significantly different

from zero. However, partially consistent with the findings of Wai and Gordon (2005)

who found that out of nine portfolios only four alphas are significant at the 5 percent

level. The average values for α’s of six portfolios for three periods (full sample, crisis

and non-crisis) are, 0.080, 0.092 and 0.100 respectively. It shows a slight increase in

alpha during non-crisis period.

Next, let‘s consider the estimated slope coefficients for MKT factor, β‘s, in Table 4.2.

In the three panels 5/18 beta values are negative, but none of these negative ones are

significant at the 5 percent level. From the remaining positive beta values, only three

are statistically significant; all of these are for high BE/ME portfolios (2 small and 1

big). It is interesting that the average of all beta values, irrespective of whether

significant or not for small portfolios (SL, SM, and SH) in Panel B, is 1.16. When this

is compared with the average figure of 0.24 for the big portfolios (BL, BM, and BH)

Page 122: Phd Thesis

106

in Panel B, it suggests that the small portfolios are more risky than big ones. This

gives a rational signal to the portfolio managers when they are rebalancing their

portfolios among risk averse and aggressive investors. Similarly, small portfolios are

a better choice for aggressive investors, while big portfolios are better choice for risk

adverse investors. The comparison is similar in Panel C with an average beta of small

portfolios (SL, SM, SH) of 1.89, compared against the average for big portfolios of

0.32. In Panel D, however, the average beta of small portfolios is -0.14 and for the big

portfolios it is 0.13. The average overall betas in the three panels are 0.708, 1.107, and

-0.005 overall for crisis and non-crisis periods and this clearly indicate that the beta

and hence the risk in crisis period is higher.

The estimated coefficient of the SMB factor, sp, is discussed here. In Panel B, C, and

D for instance 14/18 of the sp coefficients are significant at the 5 percent level. In

short, it suggests that size factor can explain the differences in average returns across

stocks in 14 portfolios out of 18. Only two of these values are negative, this means

that when the size factor increase on weekly basis the corresponding return of

portfolio decreases by the value of slope coefficient. Moreover, the slopes on SMB

for stocks are related to size (see Chapter 2). In relation to what is discussed in the

previous paragraph, it is clear that for the CSE data the SMB factor is more important

than MKT factor. In other words this suggests that SMB, the mimicking returns for

the size factor, is able to capture the shared variation in portfolio returns that is missed

by the market (MKT). The average sp for the nine small portfolios in the three panels

is 0.091. In contrast, the average for the big portfolios is –0.062. This suggests that

small portfolios are more sensitive to the SMB than big portfolios. A compression

across Panel B, Panel C and Panel D demonstrates that BH portfolio is not significant

and yields a negative slope for all the periods.

The third factor, the HML, is a proxy for capturing the effect of BE/ME in the model.

Interestingly in panels B, C and D 16/18 hp coefficients are significant at the 5 percent

level. The weekly returns from portfolio BL is negatively related to the HML as per

panels B and D. It suggests that the HML is capable of capturing shared variation in

stock returns of the CSE. The average of HML coefficients (six portfolios) in crisis

and non-crisis periods are 0.0135 and -0.003 respectively. It reveals that in crisis

Page 123: Phd Thesis

107

periods all the six portfolios on average negatively related to the FF3F factors, while

it has positive for non-crisis periods.

Thus, the two factors SMB and HML are able to capture the variations of portfolio

returns that are missed by the MKT factor in the CSE. This finding is consistent with

other findings in the historical literature (Fama and French 1993: 21; Wai and Gordon

2005: 703). In the analysis of their findings, Fama and French (1993) conclude that

adding SMB and HML to the regressions collapse the β‘s for stocks toward 1.0 (low β

move up and high β move down). However, this pattern is not prominently seen in the

current results in CSE. They also conclude that this behavior is due to the correlation

between market and SMB and HML.

The strong performance of the SMB and HML factors in explaining the returns of the

CSE portfolios is clear. The reported adjusted R2 can be used to statistically establish

this assertion. The low value of reported R2 is a common occurrence in the literature

in Sri Lanka (see Section 4.4). The present research is particularly interested in

whether the addition of the SMB and HML variables to the single factor model in

equation (3.2) improves the model‘s goodness of fit. In other words, the research

attempts to answer the question whether the FF3F is a better representation of the

CSE portfolios than the CAPM. It is evident that the adjusted R2 had monotonically

increased from CAPM (in Table 4.1) to FF3F (in Table 4.2). The average adjusted R2

of the CAPM regressions is 0.2511; the average for the FF3F is 0.4289. This result

confirms that the FF3F is more powerful than CAPM in explaining the variation of

portfolio returns.

The adjusted R2 values in Table 4.2 can be looked at according to the period of

study—full sample, crisis, and non-crisis. For instance, the average of the adjusted R2

in the six portfolios during crisis period is 0.53. This figure is much higher than in the

other two periods: for the full sample it is 0.3623; for the non-crisis period 0.3876.

Earlier in this section, in discussing the estimated constant term of the model, it was

asserted that the intercepts being close to zero implied that the FF3F variables had

useful explanatory power. The evidence based on the adjusted R2 also supports this.

Page 124: Phd Thesis

108

In view of the objectives of this research, it is important to sum up this section by

contrasting the FF3F‘s performance in crisis periods vis-à-vis its performance in the

non-crisis periods. Some differences can be found between Panel C and Panel D in

Table 4.2 that reports the FF3F results for crisis and non-crisis periods in Sri Lanka.

For example, it is significant to take into consideration the behavior of the MKT

factor during crisis period and non-crisis period. All market betas are positive in crisis

period and higher than the corresponding betas of non-crisis period. This suggests that

due to the high volatility in the market the size-BE/ME portfolios are exposed to more

risky situation in a crisis setting. However, there is no significant difference in pricing

the portfolios during crisis and non crisis periods with the SMB factor and the HML

factor (both have similar number of significant coefficients in Panels C and D). The

R2 values reported in Table 4.2 confirm an improvement in R

2 value during crisis

period. The results also confirm a positive relation between size, book-to-market and

average return during crisis period in all the portfolios. However, some negative

relation between average rerun and size and book-to-market is found in non-crisis

periods.

4.6 Test for Explanatory Power of SMB and HML

The results of Sections 4.3 and 4.4 can be interpreted as a comparison of the

explanatory power of the CAPM which is a single factor model and the FF3F which is

a multi factor model. This comparison entailed a limited analysis of the relative

explanatory powers of the FF3F risk factors—MKT which approximate the market

factor, SMB which approximates the size factor and HML which approximates the

BE/ME factor. The present section extends this work further to establish the

comparative strength of the factors within the CSE context.

The present chapter re-estimates a modified version of the FF3F equation 3.2 (in p.60)

in a bid to separate out the impact of SMB and the impact of HML on the 6 size-

BE/ME portfolios. In order to test which of the two variables, SMB (size) and HML

(BE/ME) is more effective in explaining the variation of stock return, the FF3F

equation is constrained by imposing restrictions h = 0, sp=0. This procedure is free

Page 125: Phd Thesis

109

from omitted variable bias because the correlation test suggests that the omitted

variables are not positively correlated with the existing variables.

tptptpptftp SMBsMKTRR ,,, (4.1)

and (2) sp = 0 is used to highlight the impact of HML without the impact of SMB

which yields

tptptpptftp HMLhMKTRR ,,, . (4.2)

All notations are as explained for equation 3.2. This approach was used by others

previously to test the power of the FF3F factors (Groenewold and Fraser 1997). It is

important to measure the power of factors separately for the factors because when all

the three factors are put together in the model, the significance of one factor may

offset with other factor/factors. The risk profiles captured by these factors individually

can be used by investors to rebalance their portfolios from time to time. The test

results for full sample and sub-periods are presented in Table 4.3. It presents the

results fitting the models in equations 4.1 and 4.2 to the CSE data. The

presentation/format of the table adheres to the format used by Charitou and

Constantinidis (2004: 31).

To explain the presentation of the table the first row of results can be used as an

example. It presents estimated results of equation 4.1 for the SL portfolio. The results

are useful to identify the explanatory power of the SMB in the case of this portfolio.

Notice that as the coefficient hp is not estimated in this instance hp and h(t) columns

are left empty. The first row is followed by the estimated coefficients and the t-values

for equation 4.1 for the remaining portfolios. Thus, the top half of Panel A present

results for equation 4.1 only. The rest of Panel A, the bottom half, presents the results

of estimating equation 4.2 for the 6 portfolios. Adhering to this format will be

followed in the rest of this thesis and the reminder of Table 4.3, Panel B and Panel C,

repeat the same estimates for crisis and non-crisis periods.

Page 126: Phd Thesis

110

Table 4.3: A test of explanatory power of SMB and HML (1wk 1999 to 52wk 2008).

Rf,t is the three month treasury bill rate observed at each week. At end of June each year t, for the period

1999 to 2008 the CSE stocks are allocated in an independent sort to two groups (small or big) based on

their market capitalization (stock price into outstanding shares). Thereafter, all stocks are allocated in

an independent sort to three BE/ME groups based on the 30th

and 70th

percentile. This yields six

portfolios, namely, SL, SM, SH, BL, BM, and BH. MKT, SMB and HML are as discussed in Chapter 3.

In order to test which of the two variables SMB (size) and HML (BE/ME) is more powerful the

variation of stock return, the FF3F equation constrained by imposing restrictions hp = 0, and sp = 0.

Regressions: tptptpptftp SMBsMKTRR ,,,

tptptpptftp HMLhMKTRR ,,,

Panel A: Full Sample Period

Exp.

Var.

Dep.

Var.

αp βp sp hp α(t) β(t) s(t) h(t) R2 adj

MKT SL -0.012 0.394 0.001 - -0.720 0.912 3.55* - 0.423

and SM -0.015 0.706 0.003 - -1.110 2.01* 3.82* - 0.233

SMB SH 0.130 3.021 0.001 - 3.17* 3.01* 0.548 - 0.215

BL 0.556 -1.79 -0.024 - 3.49* -0.461 -2.55* - 0.209

BM -0.015 0.303 0.002 - -1.107 0.870 3.25* - 0.319

BH 0.023 0.733 -0.004 - 1.16 1.49 -4.01* - 0.034

MKT SL 0.006 -0.360 - -0.003 0.360 0.822 - -0.844 0.199

and SM 0.003 0.668 - 0.001 0.257 1.881 - -0.512 0.203

HML SH 0.156 2.950 - 0.007 3.71* 2.93* - 0.843 0.216

BL 0.418 -1.512 - 0.001 2.53* -0.392 - 0.651 0.203

BM 0.004 0.262 - 0.000 0.290 0.740 - 0.037 0.197

BH 0.032 0.671 - 0.001 1.59 1.37 - 4.48* 0.042

Panel B: Crisis Period

Exp.

Var.

Dep.

Var.

αp βp sp

hp α(t) β(t) s(t) h(t) R2 adj

MKT SL -0.003 0.878 0.003 - -0.920 1.980 1.773 - 0.251

and SM -0.021 0.865 0.016 - -0.540 1.763 0.795 - 0.217

SMB SH 0.762 2.454 0.060 - 0.768 2.452

*

0.57 - 0.354

BL 0.170 0.659 -0.004 - 1.479 0.466 -0.690 - 0.216

BM -0.042 0.589 0.002 - -1.376 1.559 1.457 - 0.223

BH 0.013 0.089 -0.005 - 0.19 0.101 -1.27 - 0.003

MKT SL -0.001 0.704 - -0.000 -0.045 1.530 - -0.102 0.206

and SM 0.078 0.699 - 0.003 0.193 1.412 - -0.595 0.212

HML SH 0.239 5.514 - 0.008 1.173 2.22* - 0.243 0.235

BL 0.196 0.489 - 0.002 1.650 -0.341 - 0.316 0,208

BM -0.126 0.423 - 0.001 -

.0.390

1.089 - 0.323 0.206

BH 0.027 -0.013 - 0.002 0.36 -0.01 - 1.42 0.004

Page 127: Phd Thesis

111

Table 4.3 (continued)

Panel C: Non Crisis Period

Exp.

Var.

Dep.

Var.

αp βp sp hp α(t) β(t) s(t) h(t) R2 adj

MKT SL -0.012 0.125 0.004 - -0.613 3.31*

*

- 0.221

and SM -0.015 0.480 0.003 - -1.022 0.926 3.89* - 0.434

SMB SH 0.109 -0.474 0.060 - 3.05* -0.391 0.493 - 0.204

BL 0.605 -2.648 -0.027 - 3.27* -0.423 -2.43* - 0.210

BM -0.012 0.046 0.003 - -0.811 0.097 3.08* - 0.218

BH 0.050 2.881 -0.005 - 1.89 3.27* -3.58* - 0.041

MKT SL 0.005 -0.496 - -0.000 0.248 -0.079 - -1.963 0.202

and SM 0.026 0.552 - -0.000 0.172 1.043 - -0.853 0.200

HML SH 0.127 -0.431 - 0.004 3.46* -0.364 - 0.636 0.203

BL 0.442 -3.235 - 0.010 2.31* -0.518 - 0.255 0.204

BM 0.005 0.112 - -0.000 0.716

0

0.835 - 0.862 0.204

BH 0.060 2.881 - 0.002 2.24* 3.24* - 3.98* 0.055

*significant at the 5 percent level

Let us now look at the top half of Panel A in Table 4.3. Here 2/6 of the estimated

intercept terms for equation 4.1 are significant at the 5 percent level. Out of six SMB

coefficients, 5 are significant at 5 percent level, out of which 2 are negative. However,

the coefficient of MKT is significant only for two portfolios and there are no negative

coefficients within the significant portfolios which indicate a positive relationship

between market risk and portfolio returns. The results indicate that SMB factor has a

significant influence on the variation of excess returns of small size-BE/ME portfolios

than market factors during the full sample period.

The same method is used for testing the explanatory power of HML. The results of

estimating equation 4.2 are given in the bottom half of Panel A. Out of six HML

portfolios, only one portfolio is significant in this occasion. Thus, explanatory power

of the model declines in replacing SMB with HML. Similarly, out of six market

factors, only one is significant at 5 percent level. Here only BH portfolio is significant

for HML and others are not significant. Finally, it can be concluded that SMB is more

powerful than HML in explaining stock returns for the entire sample period.

Panel B in Table 4.3 summarizes the regression estimates of equations 4.1 and 4.2 for

the crisis period. The power of both SMB and HML has dramatically declined in this

Page 128: Phd Thesis

112

period when compared to Panel A. None of size-BE/ME portfolio is significant in

both estimates (SMB and HML). For the market factor only SH is significant, which

is in the second half of the panel A. This result confirms that neither SMB nor HML

factors are significant in explaining the variation in stock returns during crisis periods

in CSE. The last panel reports the estimated results of equation 4.1 and 4.2 for the

non-crisis period. In this case also SMB is more powerful than HML; out of six

portfolios 5 are significant at the 5 percent level as shown in the first six rows of

Panel C. Finally for the non- crisis series shown in Panel C, out of six portfolios five

are significant. Conversely, only one is insignificant for SMB and in case for the

HML factor only BH is significant. In this case SMB is more powerful than HML.

The adjusted R2 value improves the estimates of equation 4.1 which captures SMB

and MKT as explanatory variable. The average adjusted R2 for SMB is 0.314 and for

the HML is 0.289. This means that on average 31% portfolio returns are explained by

SMB and 28% by HML in CSE. In summary, in the Sri Lankan market, SMB is

powerful than HML as the proxies in capturing the variation of portfolio returns. This

result confirms that size factor is more dominant in the Sri Lankan stock market

during the estimation period. During crisis periods the explanatory power of the SMB

and HML decline significantly.

The above results may be attributable to several reasons that prevail in the economy in

a situation where an economy is exposed to a crisis. Generally in a crisis situation

macro economic factors deteriorate at an exponential rate. In a bad economic

environment high inflation, high interest rates, changes in money supply, fluctuation

of exchange rates, etc. are unavoidable. All of these affect the performance of firms in

the country. These factors directly affect the performance of firm‘s fundamental

variables. High inflation leads to high cost of production and due to this firm are not

in a position to set competitive prices in the market for their products. High interest

rate creates more credit risk for the firms, leading to loosing of confidence in

investors and other stakeholders. These consequences directly affect the performance

of firm fundamentals. The factors estimated here are based on company fundamentals.

Among the two variables examined here HML is more fundamentally based than

SMB, because it is mostly based on accounting variables such as accounting

Page 129: Phd Thesis

113

treatments for deferred taxies and treatment for capital and revenue reserves.

Therefore, economic interpretation to the above results can be generalized as

deterioration of firm fundamentals (BE/ME in this study) due to the fluctuation of

macroeconomic variables in crisis and non-crisis periods.

4.7 Market anomalies and the January Effect in the CSE

The results of estimating the CAPM and the FF3F reveal that the returns for the CSE

portfolios are more responsive to the market anomalies (SMB, and HML) than to the

market factor (MKT). Further, in the previous section it was observed that the way

market anomalies operate is sensitive to crises: the estimated SMB and HML are

notably different in crisis period than in non-crisis period. The above sensitivity of the

results to primarily a time-bound phenomenon, led this research to look into the most

widely discussed time-bound anomaly in the literature: the January effect. The present

section seeks to measure whether the results presented so far demonstrate any

sensitivity to the January effect.

Chapter 2 examines time periods in the finance literature where the January effect as

an anomaly has been documented. For instance, Keim (1983) and Roll (1983)

document that a significant portion of the size premium to small firms occurs in

January. In this backdrop, it would be interesting to examine whether the anomalies in

the Sri Lankan stock market also change their behavior in January. The present

section achieves this by closely following the methodology of Wai and Gordon (2005:

714) who examined market anomalies in three Asian emerging markets (Hong Kong,

Singapore and Taiwan).

4.7.1 Preliminary evidence of January effect in the CSE

To start with, it is appropriate that some preliminary tests for the presence of January

effect in the CSE be conducted. This is done by examining whether the return, in the

month of January in the CSE is different to returns in other months. This comparison

is performed for all return processed used in the study, including those for the six

size-BE/ME portfolios and the market. To be more specific, the returns in the month

of January for the ten years examined here are extracted and compared against the

Page 130: Phd Thesis

114

non-January returns. For additional analysis the returns for January first week are also

separated.

Some statistics regarding the above data are presented in Table 4.4. The table offers a

column each for returns from January months, January first weeks, and non-January

months. All information is presented for the full sample. The small number of

observations in Sri Lanka prevents the analysis from being extended to look at the

crisis sensitivity.

Table 4.4: Mean excess returns for the CSE portfolios. The average values represent the mean

value of seven portfolios for the intended period, which is the total return for all the seven

portfolios.

Variable January 1wk January Non-January

SL 0.101 0.308 0.007

SM 0.043 0.193 0.005

SH 0.198 0.173 0.138

BL 0.253 -0.127 0.391

BM 0.036 0.080 0.001

BH 0.072 0.851 -0.012

MKT 0.005 0.016 0.001

Average 0.117 0.246 0.088

The means of excess returns for portfolios reported in Table 4.4 are mostly positive

(19/21 means are positive). The two means that are negative are for big sized

portfolios (BL in Panel B and BH in Panel C). Similar results are reported by Keim

(1983) which showed that big firms have negative average excess returns. The

average values present in the panels (A, B and C) represents the average of the six

portfolios in each panel. Out of three panels, the highest average yield is in Panel B

(first week in January) and the second is in Panel A (January months). It is clear that

January returns are higher than non-January returns. This suggests that the January

effect exists in the CSE.

Table 4.4 is further analyzed to ascertain whether the January effect has a

significantly influence on the performance of small and big portfolios. A close look

Page 131: Phd Thesis

115

into the Table 4.4 revealed that the average return of small portfolios recorded highest

in 1st week of January (0.224), and the lowest is reported in non-January (0.05).

Similarly, the highest mean return for big portfolios (0.268) is in 1st week of January.

These numbers reveal that big portfolios have performed better in January than small

portfolios. This result is contradictory with the findings of Keim (1983) and Roll

(1983) who show that small firms yield a higher premium than the big firms.

4.7.2 The CSE, January effect and the FF3F

The previous subsection, by establishing that returns from the CSE are different

across January and non-January months, builds a case for a more formal examination

of January effect in the applications of the FF3F for the CSE. Table 4.5 presents the

result of fitting equation 3.4 to excess returns from the six portfolios from the CSE for

January months (Panel A) and for non-January months (Panel B). As the CSE data is

available for only 10 years, the January month estimations are done with 40 (4×10)

observations. However, one might question why the researcher did not use January

dummies and interactions and condition on all 10 years of data other than splitting

data in to January. But, the investigator wanted to observe the behavior of all three

factors of the model, for the January months only. This purpose will not be served in

applying the dummy variable.

According to the results, the market factor (MKT) is not significant in explaining

January return and non-January returns in CSE. In both panels (A and B) none of size-

BE/ME portfolio is significant for MKT factors. This is not surprising as MKT was

not significant in the results presented in Sections 4.4 and 4.5 which included both

January and non-January data. Another interesting finding is that all the coefficients

for the market factor are negative in January (Panel A). However, with non-January

data all β coefficients are positive. However, as noted above, none of these are

significant at the 5 percent level.

Table 4.5 also attempts to distinguish whether there are noticeable January impacts on

the way SMB and HML affect the pricing of portfolios. The number of instances

where the SMB factor is significant has not shown much difference in January and

non-January months. Out of six coefficients of SMB, only two are significant with

Page 132: Phd Thesis

116

January data and this goes up to three with non-January data. Both factors are

significant for more portfolios in non-January months than in January months. It

seems that the significance of factors SMB and HML for the full sample (see Table

4.2) are mostly the result of the impact of non-January data. Another pattern that is

noticeable in Table 4.5 is that all small portfolios have significant coefficients for both

SMB and HML.

Earlier it was argued that the SMB and HML factors were mostly significant in

explaining the variation of stock returns (see Table 4.2 and Table 4.3). However,

when the data is differentiated as January and non-January, the explanatory power of

these factors seems to decrease. Though Table 4.4 illustrates that the portfolio returns

in January months is higher than in non-January months, the FF3F is not able to

capture this increase. In practical sense several reasons can be attributed for FF3F not

being an accurate description of the market activity in months of the CSE during

January months. The argument of tax-loss selling in explaining the January effect

does not apply to the Sri Lankan stock market where there are no capital gains taxes

in place according to the prevailing tax law (Inland Revenue Act. 2007/2008).

However, a partial effect may come from foreign investors who hold large portfolios

in the CSE and are subject to capital gains taxation under the national tax codes in

their countries.

Another reason is that the portfolio management in Sri Lanka is still in an infant stage

as the financial system in the country is still in a developing stage. This leads to

infrequent portfolio rebalancing in the market. A more powerful explanation for the

non existence of January effect in Sri Lankan market can be attributed to timing in

disclosure of financial statements. The Companies registered at the Sri Lankan market

have to disclose their cumulative financial statements quarterly throughout the year.

The financial year in Sri Lanka is March through April. The results of this study is

consistent with the previous studies of Guneratne (2001). This study examined the

two phenomena in the financial knowledge base known as the January effect and

monthly seasonality for the period 1985 to 1998 and confirmed that January effect is

not significant for the case of Sri Lanka.

Page 133: Phd Thesis

117

Table 4.5: Testing of responses of FF3F to the January effect 1999 to 2008 in CSE

Rf,t is the three month treasury bill rate observed at each week. At end of June each year t, for the period

1999 to 2008, the CSE stocks are allocated in an independent sort to two groups (small or big) based

on their market capitalization (stock price into outstanding shares). Thereafter, all stocks are allocated

in an independent sort to three BE/ME groups based on the 30th

and 70th

percentile. This yields six

portfolios, namely, SL, SM, SH, BL, BM, and BH. MKT, SMB and HML as discussed in Chapter 3.

Weekly returns of January months are collected for all the portfolios and include 40 (4wk×10yrs)

observations. The data for non-January months are taken from 1999 February to 2008 December,

excluding those in the 40 observations from the January months of course. Panel A presents the results

of January months and Panel B represents the results of non-January months.

Regression: tptptptpptftp HMLhSMBsMKTRR ,,,

Book to market equity (BE/ME) portfolio

Low Medium High Low Medium High

Size

Panel A: January Months (1999–2008)

αp α(t)

Small 0.037 -0.002 0.420 0.240* -0.041 2.09*

Big 0.432 0.023 0.063 1.041 0.420 1.010

βp β (t)

Small -3.130 -0.871 -2.510 -0.860 -0.672 -0.530

Big -4.091 -0.223 -0.513 -0.422 -0.174 -0.351

sp s(t)

Small 0.042 0.036 0.040 1.852 4.430* 1.360

Big -0.029 0.035 -0.004 -0.480 4.151* -0.050

hp h(t)

Small 0.100 0.009 0.019 1.400 3.55* 1.960

Big -0.003 0.010 0.010 -0.200 3.72* 3.43*

R2 adj s(e)

Small 0.344 0.621 0.350 0.740 0.268 0.960

Big 0.202 0.551 0.940 1.993 0.272 0.301

Panel B: Non January Months (1999-2008)

αp α(t)

Small 0.0100 0.013 0.124 0.690 0.970 3.77*

Big 0.041 0.008 0.031 1.543 0.599 1.46

βp β (t)

Small 0.472 0.613 0.110 1.353 1.820 0.142

Big 0.052 0.147 0.712 0.080 0.440 1.392

sp s(t)

Small 0.017 0.015 0.014 8.14* 7.36* 2.85*

Big -0.004 0.016 0.001 -1.053 7.80* 0.320

hp h(t)

Small 0.005 0.005 0.004 7.37* 6.80* 2.60*

Big -0.001 0.005 0.002 -1.274 7.05* 2.02*

R2 adj s(e)

Small 0.332 0.314 0.401 0.269 0.260 0.608

Big 0.603 0.318 0.661 0.500 0.256 0.395

*significant at the 5 percent level

Page 134: Phd Thesis

118

4.8 Summary and Conclusion

This chapter empirically tests the CAPM and the FF3F and rejects CAPM in favor of

FF3F for the case of the CSE data. The market factor is not significant in the majority

of the portfolios when considering the full sample, crisis periods or non-crisis period.

In contrast the FF3F better fits the CSE data. The additional two factors—SMB and

HML—of the FF3F seem to be able to predict the excess returns of the six size-

BE/ME portfolios better than the market factor. In the FF3F or the three factor model,

only SMB and HML are significant in the majority of portfolios. This leads to the

conclusion that the market factor is insignificant in pricing stocks in the CSE. In

addition, while the well documented anomaly of January effect is also observed in the

CSE data, the FF3F is not able to capture this effect adequately.

Page 135: Phd Thesis

119

Chapter 5

Testing of Asset Pricing Models for the US

5.1 Introduction

This chapter presents the results of fitting the CAPM and the FF3F to the weekly

stock market data from the US. This makes it possible to compare the behavior of

these models with the CSE and US data, which is one of the stated objectives of this

thesis. Further, this exercise is in itself an important addition to the literature as

weekly US stock returns has so far not been used with these models.

Chapter 1 asserts that a large numbers of studies empirically test the CAPM with the

FF3F using data from developed markets. This assertion was substantiated in Chapter

2, where some of the results of these studies were examined. This examination

revealed that none of the developed country studies had tested the hypothesis that

these models behave differently under market crisis situations. Looking at this is

particularly important in the case of the US because the most catastrophic of crises—

in terms of their global spread and the losses inflicted—originated from the US, for

instance the global crises in 1987 and in 2008. Methodology described in Chapter 3

which was used with Sri Lankan data in Chapter 4 is reapplied in the present chapter

for the testing of the CAPM, the FF3F and the January effect using the US data.

The rest of the chapter is structured as follows. Section 5.2 briefly examines economy

and the stock market of the US in the context of crisis experiences. This is important

to contextualize the empirical work in the current chapter. Section 5.3 summarizes the

results of fitting the CAPM and the FF3F to the weekly US data. The additional

assessment conducted to measure the explanatory power of the SMB and HML

factors are discussed in Section 5.4. The January effect, which is a pervasive anomaly

in the US market and its relevance to the six FF3F portfolios, is explored in Section

5.5 followed by some concluding remarks in Section 5.6.

Page 136: Phd Thesis

120

5.2 The US Economy

This section provides a cursory look at the US economy. This is important because it

helps to understand the stock market activity in the US, which is the primary focus of

the present chapter. For instance, according to the CAPM and the FF3F a key

determinant of stock price movement is the return on the market portfolio which is

impacted by the overall performance of the economy. This section reviews the recent

macroeconomic and financial indicators that are considered to be the key macro

variables that influence stock market performance. The economic indicators directly

influence the fluctuation of market portfolio of any country. However, it is

noteworthy highlighting the behavior of the economic variables in the US because the

performance of the US economy is a key factor for the performance of the markets of

rest of the world as it is the largest economy in the world.

Table 5.1 tabulates annual values of five variables which summarize the recent

performance of the US economy. The data presented in the table covers the period

from 1980 to 2009, which includes the period examined in this thesis. Table shows

that nominal GDP has increased throughout this period. In 1980 the GDP was $2,788

bn which had increased many times over to $14,119 bn by 2009. However, the growth

in real GDP, which is also reported in the table, offers a different perspective and

shows that the US growth has not increased during this period. It is evident that

growth has oscillated around the period average of 2.7% during 1980-2009. The

growth figures also reveal declining economic performance in the last few years of

1980‘s and also post-2008. These patterns will be referred to later in this section.

The per capita disposable personal income reported in Table 5.1 adjusts the above

data for population growth. Interestingly it has increased steadily over the period from

1980 to 2009. These increases are in real terms as the reported per capita incomes in

2005 are for constant prices. Declining inflation reflected reported by the GDP

deflator during this period and no doubt helped the growth of disposable income. The

GDP deflator also reveals that early 1980‘s was inflationary for the US economy,

compared to the period after that.

Page 137: Phd Thesis

121

Table 5.1: Macro Variables of US Economy

GDP

($ bn)

GDP

Growth

Per capita

disposable

personal

income

(2005

constant

prices)

GDP

Deflator

Net gov

lending or

net

borrowing

(-) $ bn

1980 2,788 -0.3 18,863 9.1 (75.7)

1981 3,127 2.5 19,173 9.4 (73.5)

1982 3,253 -1.9 19,406 6.1 (161.3)

1983 3,535 4.5 19,868 4.0 (201.8)

1984 3,931 7.2 21,105 3.8 (190.4)

1985 4,218 4.1 21,571 3.0 (215.5)

1986 4,460 3.5 22,083 2.2 (238.5)

1987 4,736 3.2 22,246 2.9 (208.4)

1988 5,100 4.1 22,997 3.4 (186.7)

1989 5,482 3.6 23,385 3.8 (181.7)

1990 5,801 1.9 23,568 3.9 (251.8)

1991 5,992 -0.2 23,453 3.5 (301.3)

1992 6,342 3.4 23,958 2.4 (373.1)

1993 6,667 2.9 24,044 2.2 (338.3)

1994 7,085 4.1 24,517 2.1 (262.3)

1995 7,415 2.5 24,951 2.1 (244.5)

1996 7,839 3.7 25,475 1.9 (179.7)

1997 8,332 4.5 26,061 1.8 (73.8)

1998 8,794 4.4 27,299 1.1 27.0

1999 9,354 4.8 27,805 1.5 64.4

2000 9,952 4.1 28,899 2.2 146.6

2001 10,286 1.1 29,299 2.3 (65.1)

2002 10,642 1.8 29,976 1.6 (422.4)

2003 11,142 2.5 30,442 2.2 (553.3)

2004 11,868 3.6 31,193 2.8 (531.1)

2005 12,638 3.1 31,318 3.3 (418.3)

2006 13,399 2.7 32,271 3.3 (291.6)

2007 14,062 1.9 32,693 2.9 (408.1)

2008 14,369 0 32,946 2.2 (912.3)

2009 14,119 -2.6 32,847 0.9 (1,592.7)

Source: Bureau of Economic Analysis US Department of Commerce

Page 138: Phd Thesis

122

The last economic indicator shown in the Table 5.1 is the net borrowings of the

economy which reveals that apart from a brief period in late 1990‘s, the US has been

a net borrower throughout the period examined here. The biggest ever deficit of

$1,593 bn was recorded in 2009 attributed to the impact of the event that followed

after 2008.

The relevance of macroeconomic analysis is multifaceted in this study. First, the stock

markets are key contributors of the economic growth as it facilitates the capital

investment need in the economy. For example, if people have per capita income in

excess of consumption, they can invest it and can gain returns in future. The stock

market facilitates the general public to get the ownership of the companies by

purchasing shares. On the other hand, the companies can gather long term capital

requirement without much difficulty if the country has a potential investor base. This

simple example very clearly suggests that the performance of the companies is based

on the prevailing macro economy of the country. Second, the variables presented in

Table 5.1 are identified as major determinants of the performance of the US market.

The market factor is key variable in this study which determines the performance of

the model significantly.

Moreover, the corporate profit is also based on the soundness of variables such as

GDP, per capita income and inflation etc. The key variables, SMB and HML of FF3F

represent the profitability of the companies largely. Therefore, capital market based

research demands substantive analysis of macro economy of the country to obtain

sound background for the analysis of the findings.

In view of the subject covered in this thesis it is important to specially look at the

financial sector of the US economy. Table 5.2 tabulates six variables that are useful

for such a discussion. The performance of capital markets are influenced by these

financial factors. For example, there is a close relationship between long term interest

rates and the share prices in investors‘ standpoint. The strength of exchange rate is

also important to attract international investors. It is one of the key determinants of

the international risk component of the capital market.

Page 139: Phd Thesis

123

Table 5.2: Financial Indicators of US Economy

Central

Governm

ent total

debt

($ mn)

Long

term

interest

rates %

Share

Price

Index

Share

Returns

Annual

Inflation

(CPI) %

Exchange

Rate

(SDR/

USD)

1980 716,500 11.46 9.80 - 13.50 0.77

1981 795,400 13.91 10.60 8% 10.30 0.85

1982 930,700 13.00 9.90 -7% 6.10 0.91

1983 1,141,700 11.11 13.30 34% 3.20 0.94

1984 1,300,900 12.44 13.30 0% 4.30 0.97

1985 1,508,100 10.62 15.60 17% 3.50 0.97

1986 1,742,900 7.68 19.60 26% 1.90 0.85

1987 1,894,400 8.38 23.30 19% 3.70 0.77

1988 2,055,400 8.85 21.60 -7% 4.10 0.74

1989 2,165,800 8.50 25.90 20% 4.80 0.78

1990 2,426,100 8.55 26.40 2% 5.40 0.74

1991 2,760,200 7.86 29.70 13% 4.20 0.73

1992 3,064,200 7.01 33.00 11% 3.00 0.71

1993 3,297,400 5.87 35.90 9% 3.00 0.72

1994 3,483,700 7.08 36.60 2% 2.60 0.70

1995 3,654,200 6.58 41.90 14% 2.80 0.66

1996 3,778,400 6.44 51.50 23% 2.90 0.69

1997 3,814,800 6.35 65.70 28% 2.30 0.73

1998 3,760,400 5.26 79.20 21% 1.60 0.74

1999 3,665,600 5.64 89.10 13% 2.20 0.73

2000 3,395,489 6.03 92.60 4% 3.40 0.76

2001 3,339,674 5.02 87.10 -6% 2.80 0.79

2002 3,553,420 4.61 75.90 -13% 1.60 0.77

2003 3,924,300 4.02 74.10 -2% 2.30 0.71

2004 4,307,420 4.27 90.00 21% 2.70 0.68

2005 4,605,970 4.29 100.00 11% 3.40 0.68

2006 4,848,260 4.79 113.70 14% 3.20 0.68

2007 5,054,930 4.63 131.30 15% 2.90 0.65

2008 5,820,460 3.67 109.40 -17% 3.80 0.63

2009 7,561,736 3.26 82.90 -24% (0.40) 0.65

Source: Organization for Economic Co-operation and Development

Table 5.2 unveils six financial indicators of the US for the 1980-2009 periods. Among

these six the volume of government debt has dramatically increased during the past

Page 140: Phd Thesis

124

three decades. The other financial indicators shown in Table 5.2 are also directly

affecting the capital market operation. Among them long term interest rates and

inflation go in hand with stock prices. At a glance that pattern is aptly demonstrated in

the values shown in the table as well. Theoretically the share prices and interest rates

have negative relationship, whereas share price and inflation has positive relationship.

Figure 5.1: Some economic and financial variables for the US. The perforated line

graphs should be read off the right axis; the solid graphs off the left axis. As the

horizontal time scale is common to both panels only it is spelt out only in the bottom

panel.

-4%

-2%

0%

2%

4%

6%

8%

-10%

0%

10%

20%

30%

40%

Gov. Debt (Left) GDP Growth (Right)

Panel A

0%

2%

4%

6%

8%

10%

12%

14%

16%

-30%

-20%

-10%

0%

10%

20%

30%

40%

Share returns (Left) Interest Rate (Right)

Panel B

Panel A and Panel B of Figure 5.1 highlight relations between some of the variables

from Table 5.1 and 5.2. These graphical methods are useful to expose links between

series of data. For instance, Figure 5.1.A looks at the annual percentage changes of

Page 141: Phd Thesis

125

government debt and GDP growth rates of the US market for the period from 1981 to

2009. The growth of government debt has decreased during 1980s and 1990s

gradually and again it has started to increase dramatically since the beginning of

2000s. A towering trend of government debt is seen since the beginning of 2007. This

can be interpreted as the reflection of bail-out packages gained by the government to

overcome the 2008 crisis. On the other hand, the GDP growth rates highly fluctuated

during this period. It has gradually declined up to 2007 and after that dramatically

declined up to -2% in 2009. This can be identified as the decline of the total

productivity of the economy due to the recent economic turmoil.

Furthermore, Figure 5.1.B displays movements of the annual returns from share

markets and annual long term interest rates. The line which represents the left hand

side axis shows the share returns, while the line falling from right hand side axis

represents the interest rates. At a glance one can notice that these two variables

furnish a pattern of inverse relationship throughout the period. The reason for this

pattern may be that as the long term interest rate comes down investors shift from

bonds to common stocks as the prices of shares go up in the market due to demand

and supply mechanism. However, it shows a dramatic decline of both long term

interest rates and share prices at the beginning and the during the 2008 economic

crisis of the US.

Figure 5.1 demonstrates that the 2008 crisis is more severe than other crises that have

occurred in the US during the recent past. For example during the 1987 crisis there

was no big fluctuation of government debt and GDP growth as shown in Panel A in

the figure. However, Figure 5.1.B shows a dramatic decrease in long term interest

rates over the period of 1980 and 2009, whereas the share prices reflect a constant

trend with high volatility annually.

As previously stated the major concern of this study is the substantiation of asset

pricing models in crisis situations in the world. The analysis conducted above

demonstrated that the economic and financial variables in the US were sensitive to

crises in the country. Therefore, it is deemed that a discussion about the impact of

crises on the US stock markets is useful here.

Page 142: Phd Thesis

126

Still more than 50% of global stock market share14

is held by US market. Therefore,

US market is a very important determinant in shaping the stock pricing behavior of

global stock markets. The evidences in the previous paragraphs revealed that stock

prices are considerably driven by macroeconomic factors which impact the US

market. Among the market crises that have occurred in the history of capital markets

the 1987 and the recent 2008 crises have most profoundly influenced the performance

of US market. Therefore, it is worthwhile to explain at this point about these two

crises.

Impact of 1987 Crisis on US Market

In the above analysis it is noticed that the 1987 crash has a direct link to the economic

variables and financial variables. In addition to what is discussed in the above

paragraphs, higher export earnings due to the devaluation of dollar have resulted in a

favorable balance sheet for companies. The company fundamentals have shown

favorable values for attracting more investments. These facts induced the demand for

the stocks of the companies that led to stock price hike. It is illustrated in Figure 5.1.B

which shows a sharp increase of stock price at the beginning of 1988. The subsequent

government intervention created the crash (taxes, falling interest rates etc.) in the

market. This evidence reveals that the both company level fundamental factors and

macro economic factors have influenced the crisis.

In the first half of 1987, the US dollar experienced a steep decline in value relative to

other world currencies. This made US goods and services less expensive and resulted

in increased exports. The increase in exports provided US companies with a strong

outlook on earnings and the stock market took off. There has been a great deal of

corporate restructuring in the years proceeding 1987 for American companies which

have been promising strong future earnings growth. International investors have also

taken notice of the improvements in the US market outlook.

14 Global share of equity investment April 2005 Standard and Poor‘s 2005 p.12.

Page 143: Phd Thesis

127

Many of the explanations for the 1987 stock market crash and the volatility associated

with it are peculiar to financial institutions in the United States, and some to the

NYSE in particular. Mitchell and Netter (1989) argue that tax legislation introduced

in the week before on October 19, 1987, contributed to the crash. Others have argued

that the effect of computerized trading linking stock, options, and futures markets,

(sometimes called index arbitrage or portfolio insurance) on the 1987 crisis. As

described by Roll (1988, 1989), the important fact that the 1987 crash was

simultaneous and similar around the world challenges all explanations are distinctive

to a specific country; even a country as large as the U.S.

Repercussions of the Crisis of 2008

According to the prevailing evidences, the 2008 crash is considered as the biggest

crash that occurred after the great depression in 1929. The major cause for this

financial crisis is the reckless providing of loans by financial institutions, particularly

to the housing sector without proper supervision, and the resulting eventual

bankruptcy of such financial institutions. In other words, this is a turmoil caused by

the grant of loans to ―bad creditors‖ assuming them as good creditors.

A collapse of the US sub-prime mortgage market and the reversal of the housing

boom had ripple effects around the world. Furthermore, other weaknesses in the

global financial system have surfaced during this period. Some financial products and

instruments have become so complex and twisted, that as things start to unravel, trust

in the whole system started to fail. The extent of the problems has been so severe that

some of the world‘s largest financial institutions have collapsed. Others have been

bought out by their competition at low prices and in other cases, the governments of

the wealthiest nations in the world have resorted to extensive bail-out and rescue

packages for the remaining large banks and financial institutions.

September 16, 2008, saw the failures of large financial institutions in the United

States, which rapidly evolved into a global crisis resulting in a number of bank

failures in Europe and sharp reductions in the value of equities and commodities

worldwide. In United States 15 banks failed in 2008, while several others were

rescued through government intervention or acquisitions by other banks. The US

Page 144: Phd Thesis

128

financial market crisis is due to heavy leveraging on instruments of property markets

by investment banks. Since early 2007, there had been speculation of a possible

recession starting in early or late 2008 in some countries. The US and the UK are

clearly in financial trouble.

This section explains the behavior of US stock market and the impact of market crises

on its performance. Here considerable attention is paid to explain the previous US

market crisis. It is important because this research directly tests the CAPM and FF3F

in a crisis setting. The next section explains the regression results of tests for CAPM

and FF3F.

5.3 Tests for the CAPM and the FF3F

This section presents the results of fitting the models in equations 3.2 and 3.4 using

the weekly US data. Here also the models are fitted for crisis and non-crisis periods

identified in Chapter 3 using the ICSS test (see p.76 of this work).

5.3.1 The CAPM test results in the US

The estimation results of the regression tests for US are organized in three panels in

Table 5.3 which present the results for the full period, crisis period and the non-crisis

period. Therefore the table contains results for 18 regressions. In the three panels (A,

B and C) 6/18 intercept terms are significant at the 5 percent level. Out of the

significant intercepts two are negative. Both of these are from Table 5.3.A which

represents the full sample period. Out of the remaining 12/18 insignificant intercept

terms 8/18 are negative.

The estimated α values of portfolios represent the risk free rate of the US financial

market. For example, if the market risk free rate is approximated by the average 3

month TB rate which for the relevant period is 14.5 percent (Kenneth R. French

database), then it becomes obvious that the estimated intercept of the SML curve do

not accurately approximate the risk-free rate of the US economy. The estimated real α

is far below the TB rate of the economy. This suggests that the alpha value derived

from the CAPM cannot capture the real risk-free rate of the economy.

Page 145: Phd Thesis

129

Table 5.3: Test of CAPM in the US market

Rf,t is the three month treasury bill rate observed at each week. At end of June each year t, for the period

1985 to 2007 the NYSE stocks are allocated in an independent sort to two groups (small or big) based

on their market capitalization (stock price into outstanding shares). Thereafter all stocks are allocated in

an independent sort to three BE/ME groups based on the 30th

and 70th

percentile. This yields six

portfolios namely SL, SM, SH, BL, BM, and BH. Rmt is the excess weekly return of NYSE.

Regression: tptftmpptftp RRRR ,,,,,

Panel A: Full Sample Period

Dependent

Variables αp βp α(t) β(t) R

2 adj

SL -0.096 1.130 -2.34* 56.80* 0.720

SM 0.057 0.820 1.900 56.20* 0.720

SH 0.084 0.770 2.60* 49.90* 0.670

BL -0.003 1.050 -0.220* 146.3* 0.940

BM 0.030 0.870 1.370 83.0* 0.850

BH 0.049 0.780 1.680 56.00* 0.720

Panel B: Crisis Period

Dependent

Variables

αp βp α(t) β(t) R2 adj

SL -0.133 1.100 -1.610 32.70* 0.720

SM -0.027 0.804 -0.460 33.17* 0.720

SH -0.032 0.730 -0.540 29.80* 0.680

BL 0.054 1.060 2.060* 98.70* 0.950

BM 0.041 0.881 -1.070 56.23* 0.880

BH 0.020 0.758 -0.410 36.70* 0.760

Panel C: Non Crisis Period

Dependent

Variables

αp βp α(t) β(t) R2 adj

SL -0.067 1.110 -1.230 38.90* 0.711

SM 0.132 0.766 3.480* 38.50* 0.707

SH 0.191 0.749 4.430* 33.20* 0.642

BL -0.028 1.060 -1.380* 99.43* 0.941

BM 0.085 0.846 2.620* 49.60* 0.800

BH 0.087 0.044 1.980 34.10* 0.654

*significant at the 5 percent level

The other important coefficient in the equation 3.2 is β which represents the

systematic risk component of the portfolios. Panels A, B and C in Table 5.3 reveal

that all the 18 beta coefficients are significant at the 5 percent level. This result

confirms that the CAPM is still valid in estimating stock returns in the U.S market,

irrespective of whether the data represents crisis periods or not. In a broader sense,

this result implies that the market proxy (NYSE) is a good indicator in predicting

cross sectional average stock returns of the US market even in market crisis periods.

No significant different is found in the results for crisis and non crisis periods. This

Page 146: Phd Thesis

130

can be attributed to several factors. First the US is a developed market. Second, most

of the underlying assumptions of the CAPM are valid for the developed market which

was not the case with the CSE. In the developed markets, generally information goes

to the investors without much delay as a result the investors react to information

promptly in choosing stocks into their investment portfolios.

The values of adjusted R2 as a measure of the total variance explained by the models

are close to 1 in most of the cases. Out of 18 adjusted R2 values 14 are above 0.70.

This suggests that the model explains the variation of stock returns in US market.

Based on these results the CAPM is recommended as a valid model in predicting

stock return during market crisis periods and non crisis periods in the NYSE. No

significant differences are found in the predictability of the model between crisis and

non crisis periods.

Even though CAPM is valid in prediction stock returns in the US market, the common

issues such as usability of beta and market proxy issue in the CAPM still prevail in

the application of CAPM in the real world situation. However, its soundness in

application in developed markets is more reliable than the emerging markets.

5.3.2 Testing Results of Three Factor Model

This subsection applies the portfolio data constructed for the US market in Chapter 3

to estimate the multi factor FF3F regression in equation 3.4 using weekly US data.

The results are presented in Table 5.4 according to whether the full period, crisis

period or the non-crisis period is being used for the regression.

The estimated alphas in Table 5.4 yield both positive and negative values. Here, out

of 18 coefficients 8 are negative and 10 are statistically significant at 5 percent level.

As previously explained in Chapter 4, Fama and French (1996: 57) suggest that if

FF3F completely describes the expected returns, the regression intercepts, α, should

not be significantly different from zero. Interestingly in US market all α’s are close to

zero which suggests that the FF3F can completely explain the expected returns of

portfolios. The positive α’s which are statistically significant mean that the FF3F

Page 147: Phd Thesis

131

Table 5.4: The FF3F results for the US based on weekly data (1wk 1985 to 52wk 2007).

Rf,t is the three month treasury bill rate observed at each week. At end of June each year t, for the period

1985 to 2007 the US stocks are allocated in an independent sort to two groups (small or big) based on

their market capitalization (stock price into outstanding shares). Thereafter, all stocks are allocated in

an independent sort to three BE/ME groups based on the 30th

and 70th

percentile. This yields six

portfolios namely SL, SM, SH, BL, BM, and BH. MKT, SMB and HML as discussed in Chapter 3.

Book to market equity (BE/ME) portfolio

Low Medium High Low Medium High

Size

Regression: tptptptpptftp HMLhSMBsMKTRR ,,,

Panel A: Test for FF3F Full Sample Period

αp α(t)

Small -0.071 0.016 0.0123 -4.73* -1.540 1.430

Big 0.033 -0.026 -0.049 3.33* -1.720 -3.36*

βp β(t)

Small 1.080 0.951 0.989 126.1* 158.4* 199.9*

Big 0.949 1.020 1.040 162.4* 117.1* 124.2*

sp s(t)

Small 0.999 0.791 0.814 82.80* 150.4* 117.6*

Big -0.226 -0.125 -0.041 -27.50* -10.20* -3.55*

hp h(t)

Small -0.132 0.419 0.687 -8.680* 37.20* 78.20*

Big -0.338 0.471 0.841 3.330* 30.29* 56.00*

R2 adj RMSE

Small 0.960 0.970 0.970 0.510 0.370 0.290

Big 0.970 0.920 0.930 0.350 0.520 0.500

Panel B: Test for FF3F Crisis Period (Volatile)

αp α(t)

Small -0.071 0.015 0.007 -2.83* 0.890 0.510

Big 0.043 -0.056 0.036 2.35* -2.22* -1.420

βp β(t)

Small 1.103 0.968 0.989 76.10* 95.16* 110*

Big 0.954 1.04 1.063 88.70* 71.50* 72.60*

sp s(t)

Small 0.981 0.782 0.779 56.8* 64.5* 75.10*

Big -0.242 -0.140 -0.057 -19.0* -8.05* -3.32*

hp h(t)

Small -0.067 0.427 0.707 -2.30* 20.70* 38.90*

Big -0.323 0.489 0.902 -14.8* 16.42* 30.20*

R2 adj RMSE

Small 0.971 0.970 0.970 0.500 0.350 0.310

Big 0.985 0.956 0.940 0.370 0.511 0.510

Page 148: Phd Thesis

132

Table 5.4: (continued)

Book to market equity (BE/ME) portfolio

Low Medium High Low Medium High

Size

Panel C: Test for FF3F Non Crisis Period (Non Volatile)

αp α (t)

Small 0.086 0.024 -0.029 -3.77* 1.500 2.420*

Big 0.041 -0.000 -0.074 2.86* 0.040 -3.34*

βp β (t)

Small 1.100 0.920 0.994 80.80* 93.40* 138.0*

Big 0.956 0.998 1.060 111.0* 71.60* 80.6*

sp s(t)

Small 1.060 0.770 0.842 51.0* 51.20* 76.70*

Big -0.214 -0.115 0.007 16.30* -5.42* 0.400

hp h(t)

Small -0.112 0.421 0.698 -5.30* 27.50* 62.60*

Big -0.328 0.474 0.860 -24.60* 21.96* 41.90*

R2 adj RMSE

Small 0.950 0.940 0.970 0.550 0.400 0.290

Big 0.970 0.900 0.910 0.340 0.590 -0.530

*significant at 5 percent level

factors are consistently under predicting the portfolio returns. Here, out of significant

alphas 4 are positive. The average values for α’s of six portfolios for the three

periods—full sample, crisis and non-crisis are -0.0141, -0.0043 and 0.008

respectively. It shows a slight increase in alpha during non-crisis periods.

This provides a unique opportunity for comparing these results with those of Fama

and French (1996: 59) which involved 25 portfolios and monthly data for the period

1963-1993. In their work 16/25 alphas are close to zero and 13/25 are negative. These

earlier results can be compared with Table 5.4.A in the present study. The rest of the

results in Table 5.4 cannot be compared against Fama and French (1996) as the latter

does not separate the crisis periods as is done here. Out of the six estimated alphas in

Table 5.4.A three are significant, which is 1/2 of the total estimated alphas. Compared

to this out of the 25 estimated alphas in Fama and French (1996), 4 are significant

which is approximately 1/6 of total estimated alphas.

Among the three risk factors in the FF3F the most important variable is the estimated

slope coefficients for MKT factor, β‘s, in Table 5.4. In the three panels, all beta values

are positive and all are significant at 5 percent level. The finding of the current study

Page 149: Phd Thesis

133

is consistent with the Fama and French (1996) in their results all beta coefficients (25)

are positive and significant at 5% level and similarly in the current findings all beta

values are significant for all 6 portfolios in the full sample period. On the other hand

it is interesting that the average of all beta values for small portfolios (SL, SM, and

SH) in Panel A is 1.0. When this is compared with the average figure of the big

portfolios (BL, BM, and BH) in Panel A no difference in beta value is found. It

suggests the risk is similar in the US portfolios, irrespective of small and big

portfolios. The average betas for crisis and non-crisis periods are also concentrated on

1.0. There is no difference in beta in crisis and non-crisis periods. This implies that no

investor can get the benefit of diversification in US market among small and big

portfolios.

The estimated coefficient of the SMB factor, sp, is discussed here. In panels A, B and

C all the 18 (3x6) portfolios are significant at 5 percent level. It is also interesting to

note that 7 negative coefficients are found out of 18 coefficients. The specialty of this

finding is that these 7 coefficients are related to the big firms. Interestingly, Fama and

French (1996 : 59 ) obtained almost similar findings for big portfolios with monthly

data; that is all 6 big portfolios yield negative loadings in their findings. However, in

the current study, in full sample periods all 3 portfolios have negative loadings on

SMB. This indicates that the SMB is negatively related to the changes in the big

portfolios in the US market. Further, this means that when the size factor increase on

weekly basis, the corresponding return of portfolio decreases by the value of slope

coefficient. The average sp for the nine small portfolios in the three panels is 0868. In

contrast the average for the big portfolios is –0.128. This suggests that small

portfolios are more sensitive to the SMB than big portfolios.

The last factor in the FF3F is the HML, is a proxy for capturing the effect of BE/ME

in the model. Here also in panels A, B and C all the hp coefficients are significant at 5

percent level. One interesting finding here is that SL and BL (in all factors) yield

negative coefficients except BL in HML. However, Fama and French (1996 : 59 )

yield negative loadings for HML for all 5 low small and big portfolios in current

study it is out of 2 low portfolios (full sample) only 1 yield negative loading. All

HML loadings are significant in Fama and French‘s study and similarly in the current

Page 150: Phd Thesis

134

study also all six HML loadings are significant in full sample period. The average of

HML coefficients (six portfolios) in crisis and non-crisis periods are 0.355 and 0.335

respectively. It reveals that in crisis periods all the six portfolios on average are

slightly higher than in non-crisis period.

The results presented above indicate that the FF3F performs well in the US market.

All the three factors are equally important in determining the stock returns in the US

market. The reported adjusted R2 can be used to statistically establish this assertion.

The high value of reported R2 is a common occurrence in developed markets.

It is evident that the adjusted R2 had monotonically increased from CAPM (in Table

5.3) to FF3F (in Table 5.4). The average (in all three panels) adjusted R2 of the CAPM

regressions is 0.765 and the average for the FF3F is 0.952. This result confirms that

the FF3F is more powerful than CAPM in explaining the variation of portfolio returns

in the US market. The adjusted R2 values in Table 5.4 can be looked at according to

the period of study—full sample, crisis, and non-crisis. For instance, the average of

the adjusted R2 in the six portfolios during crisis period is 0.965. This figure is much

higher than in the other two periods: for the full sample it is 0.953; for the non-crisis

period 0.940. Earlier in this section, in discussing the estimated constant term of the

model, it was asserted that the intercepts being close to zero implied that the FF3F

variables had useful explanatory power. The evidence based on the adjusted R2 also

supports this.

The results demonstrate that these factors are able to capture the shared variation in

stock returns that are missed by the market portfolio (CAPM) in US market. All

2R are very high and ranging from 92% to 97%. That indicates the high sensitivity of

the model. These findings predominantly demonstrate that the three factor model

works very significantly in US Market during 1985-2007.

5.4 Test for Explanatory Power of SMB and HML

This section estimates the equation 4.1 and 4.2 in (see p.109) for the US market to

measure the explanatory power of SMB and HML in the FF3F for US market. This is

important to identify the individual explanatory power of the factors in the FF3F. The

Page 151: Phd Thesis

135

discussion will be made here in line with the same section in Chapter 4 so as to

facilitate the comparison of the results of both countries.

In the top half of Table 5.5.A, 3 of the 6 estimated intercept terms for equation 4.1 are

significant at the 5 percent level. Moreover, all of the SMB coefficients are significant

at 5 percent level; all of these are positive. The coefficient of MKT is also significant

at 5 percent level for all the portfolios. None of the reported values are negative which

indicates that the portfolio returns and MKT has a positive relationship in the US

market. The results indicate that SMB factor has a significant influence on the

variation of excess returns of small and big portfolios in US market

The same method is used (in Panel A) for the testing the explanatory power of HML.

The results of estimating equation 4.2 are given in the bottom half of Table 5.5.A. Out

of six HML portfolios all are significant in this occasion, of which two are negatively

related. The t-values in this case are lower than SMB, which indicates that the

explanatory power of the model declines in replacing SMB with HML. Similarly, all

the MKT coefficients are significant. Finally it can be concluded that SMB is more

powerful than HML in explaining stock returns for the entire sample period.

Page 152: Phd Thesis

136

Table 5.5: A test of explanatory power of SMB and HML (1wk 1985 to 52wk 2007).

Rf,t is the three month treasury bill rate observed at each week. At end of June each year t, for the period

1985 to 2007 the NYSE stocks are allocated in an independent sort to two groups (small or big) based

on their market capitalization (stock price into outstanding shares). Thereafter, all stocks are allocated

in an independent sort to three BE/ME groups based on the 30th

and 70th

percentile. This yields six

portfolios namely SL, SM, SH, BL, BM, and BH. MKT, SMB and HML are as discussed in Chapter 3.

In order to test which of the two variables SMB (size) and HML (BE/ME) is more powerful the

variation of stock return, the FF3F equation constrained by imposing restrictions hp = 0, and sp = 0.

Regressions: tptptpptftp SMBsMKTRR ,,,

tptptpptftp HMLhMKTRR ,,,

Panel A: Full Sample Period

Exp.

Var.

Dep.

Var.

αp βp sp hp α(t) β(t) s(t) h(t) R2 adj

MKT SL -0.086 1.120 1.020 - -5.60* 152.* 8.60* - 0.960

and SM 0.064 0.820 0.690 - 4.03* 106* 55.6* - 0.920

SMB SH 0.900 0.770 0.650 - 4.30* 75.9* 40.0 - 0.860

BL -0.004 1.050 -0.148 - -0.34 157* -13.7* - 0.950

BM 0.027 0.870 -0.233 - 1.370 90.5* -14.9* - 0.870

BH 0.046 0.780 -0.235 - 1.680 58.8* -10.9* - 0.740

MKT SL -0.038 0.970 - 0.501 -0.980 44.2 - -13.2 0.760

and SM 0.042 0.860 - 0.127 1.410 50.1* - 4.28* 0.720

HML SH 0.039 0.890 - 0.386 1.280

*

51.9* - 12.9* 0.710

BL 0.026 0.970 - -0.255 2.03* 131* - -20.0* 0.960

BM -0.030 1.030 - 0.518 -1.910 115* - 33.3* 0.920

BH -0.056 1.050 - 0.850 -3.44* 125* - 59.3* 0.920

Panel B: Crisis Period

Exp.

Var.

Dep.

Var.

αp βp sp

hp α(t) β(t) s(t) h(t) R2 adj

MKT SL -0.071 1.120 0.997 - -2.81* 109* 62.9* - 0.974

and SM 0.014 0.819 0.680 - 0.590 79.3* 42.8* - 0.950

SMB SH 0.006 0.744 0.629 - 0.200 54.2* 29.8* - 0.900

BL 0.044 1.060 -0.165 - 1.92 112.* -11.4* - 0.960

BM -0.057 0.876 -0.256 - -0.175 65.6* -12.5* - 0.910

BH -0.037 0.752 -0.272 - -0.820 40.2* -9.49* - 0.800

MKT SL -0.123 0.848 - -0.751 -1.64 20.5* - -9.30* 0.770

and SM -0.025 0.765 - 0.115 -0.44 23.5* - -1.81* 0.730

HML SH -0.034 0.782 - 0.151 -0.58 23.9* - 2.37* 0.680

BL 0.056 1.010 - -0.154 2.20 72.4* - -5.64* 0.962

BM -0.490 1.080 - 0.586 2.20 72.3* - 20.0* 0.942

BH 0.033 1.080 - 0.942 -1.28 76.5* - 34.1* 0.930

Page 153: Phd Thesis

137

Table 5.5: (continued)

Panel C: Non Crisis Period

Exp.

Var.

Dep.

Var.

αp βp sp hp α(t) β(t) s(t) h(t) R2 adj

MKT SL -0.108 1.14 1.09 - -4.73* 95.3* 53.9* - 0.949

and SM 0.108 0.780 0.646 - 4.47* 61.7* 30.0* - 0.881

SMB SH 0.167 0.763 0.636 - 5.21* 45.5* 22.3* - 0.802

BL 0.024 1.06 -0.117 - -1.21* 102* -6.69* - 0.945

BM 0.095 0.840 -0.255 - 3.11 52.6* -9.40* - 0.825

BH 0.096 0.780 -0.245 - 2.26 34.9* -6.47* - 0.676

MKT SL 0.014 0.975 - -0.435 0.270 31.7* - -9.40* 0.747

and SM 0.097 0.827 - 0.187 2.58* 37.1* - 5.59* 0.721

HML SH 0.108 0.892 - 0.442 2.78* 38.8* - 12.7* 0.716

BL 0.020 0.981 - -0.262 1.22* 97.2* - -17.2* 0.960

BM -0.009 1.01 - 0.509 -0.420 72.3* - 24.1* 0.897

BH -0.073 1.06 - 0.858 -0.07* 82.0* - 43.8* 0.916

*significant at the 5 percent level

Table 5.5.B summarizes the regression estimates of equations 4.1 and 4.2 for crisis

period in the US market which were identified using the ICSS algorithm. As shown in

the first half of the Panel B, all the six SMB coefficients are significant at 5 percent

level. Similarly, HML is significant for all the six portfolios as presented in the

second half of the Panel B. The final panel reports the estimated results of equation

4.1 and 4.2 for the non-crisis period. In this case also all the coefficients of both SMB

and HML are significant.

The adjusted R2 value improves in the estimates of equation 4.1 which captures SMB

and MKT as explanatory variable. The average adjusted R2 for SMB is 0.881and for

the HML it is 0.831. This means that on average 88% portfolio returns are explained

by SMB and 83% by HML in the US. In summary, in the US market SMB is

powerful than HML as the proxies in capturing the variation of portfolio returns. If

the R2 values of SMB and HML are compared in crisis and non-crisis periods the

explanatory power of these two models increase in crisis period. The R2 for SMB for

crisis period is 0.915 and it is for non-crisis period 0.846. Similarly for the HML R2

for crisis period is 0.835 and it is 0.826 for non-crisis period.

Page 154: Phd Thesis

138

This results very clearly demonstrates that the explanatory power of the SMB and

HML increases in crisis period. This result confirms that size factor is more powerful

in explaining portfolio returns in the US market. Nevertheless, the findings are

inconsistent with prior US results of Fama and French (1992) which shows that the

book-to-market effect (HML) is more powerful than size (SMB) in explaining

average returns. It follows that Fama and French‘s (1992) findings are reconfirmed by

the present study. These evidences imply that all factors in the FF3F cannot

universally capture all market anomalies. Their relevance differ across markets and

the samples considered.

5.5 Test Results of January effect US Market

This section summarizes the test results of January effect relating to US market for the

period of 1964 -2008 and to have further insight into January effect, the January first

week‘s mean excess returns is also calculated. The availability of long series of data

in the US market influenced the investigator to investigate long period from 1885 to

2007. Thus, the sample period for the analysis in this section is expanded to 1964

simply because this is the period where the emergence of asset pricing models taken

place (such as CAPM, Gordon Model) in the field of finance. In addition, the large

sample analysis done here is an important contribution to the literature on January

effect in the US as the existing works mostly concentrate on recent data. This section

further examines the responses of the FF3F to January effect and test the existence of

January effect for the portfolios other than single stocks.

5.5.1 Preliminary evidence of January effect US Market

This section attempts to describe the behavior of the return of portfolios between

January and non-January months. For this purpose the US return series of portfolios is

divided into three sub-sections as January, non-January and 1st week of January. By

doing so, the returns of each portfolio can be measured separately for each period. At

a glance it is very obviously seen that all portfolios yield positive returns in all the

three sub-sample period.

Page 155: Phd Thesis

139

Table 5.6: Percentage return of January & Non January 1964-2008. The average values in the

last row represent the mean value of seven portfolios for the intended period which is the total

return for all the seven portfolios.

Portfolio January Non January January 1st week

SL 0.758 0.130 1.090

SM 0.817 0.231 1.240

SH 1.080 0.246 1.640

BL 0.228 0.188 0.090

BM 0.318 0.202 0.686

BH 0.611 0.224 1.090

Average 0.635 0.203 0.972

A close look into Table 5.6 demonstrates that the January returns are higher than

non-January returns: January month average returns is 0.635, whereas for non-January

month it is 0.203. The average for January 1st week, 0.972, indicates that most of the

month‘s returns in fact accrued in the first week. This analysis further confirms the

existence of January effect in U.S market for the six FF3F portfolios.

The January effects identified above are more emphatically highlighted in Figure 5.2

which identifies the composition of mean returns that represents January, non-January

and January 1st week mean returns. It is prominently seen that there is a higher mean

returns in January 1st week for all the portfolios, except for big small which represent

least returns for the January 1st week. This gives a message to the investors that if they

hold their portfolio for long time horizon they end with lower returns. If they sell

their portfolios every January and rearrange their portfolios they get more returns than

other months. This pattern is visible for both small and big portfolios. This suggests

that any portfolio in combination with SH and BH yield more returns to investors.

Figure 5.2 reveals an interesting and useful pattern in the behavior of the mean return

across portfolios. The mean return for high HML (BE/ME) portfolios is higher than

medium HML (BE/ME) medium portfolios which in turn yields a higher return than

low HML (BE/ME) portfolios. This pattern is visible for both small and big

portfolios. This suggests that any portfolio in combination with SH and BH yield

more returns to investors.

Page 156: Phd Thesis

140

Figure 5.2: January and non-January mean returns of the FF3F portfolios for the US Market

(1964-2008).

0

0.5

1

1.5

2

SL SM SH BL BM BH

January Non January January 1st week

Mea

n R

etu

rn

5.5.2 Response of the FF3F to the January effects in the US

The above section revealed that the average return for the months of January is much

higher than that of other months. It would be interesting to apply FF3F model for the

weekly returns of January. It will importantly, measure the applicability and validity

of the FF3F under the condition of high return in the market.

Table 5.7 demonstrates that all the slope coefficients are positive for both small and

big portfolios in the US market. However, only small high (SH) and big low (BL)

portfolios are statistically significant at 5% level. The parameter for market portfolio

is highly significant in all small and big portfolios. SMB (size) portfolio is also

significant for both small and big portfolios but negative relationship is observed for

big portfolios.

The result for HML is somewhat different from SMB. Here all portfolios are

statistically significant but negative relation is reported for small low and big low

portfolios. The possible reason for this anomalous behavior is that a small company is

more likely to reinvest its earnings back into the company. Causing the retained

earnings to grow faster and increasing the value of the common stock.

Page 157: Phd Thesis

141

Table 5.7: Testing of responses of FF3F to the January effect 1964 to 2008 in US Market

Rf,t is the three month treasury bill rate observed at each week. At end of June each year t, for the period

1964 to 2008 the US stocks are allocated in an independent sort to two groups (small or big) based on

their market capitalization (stock price into outstanding shares). Thereafter, all stocks are allocated in

an independent sort to three BE/ME groups based on the 30th

and 70th

percentile. This yields six

portfolios namely SL, SM, SH, BL, BM, and BH. MKT, SMB and HML are as discussed in Chapter 3.

Weekly returns of January months are collected for all the portfolios and include 176 the (4wk×44yrs)

observations. The data for non-January months are taken from 1964 February to 2008 December,

excluding those in the 176 observations from the January months of course.

Regression: tptptptpptftp HMLhSMBsMKTRR ,,,

Book to market equity (BE/ME) portfolio

Low Medium High Low Medium High

Size

Panel A: January Months (January 1964 –January 2008)

αp α(t)

Small 0.08 0.041 0.190 1.50 1.15 6.30*

Big 0.25 0.023 0.088 4.07* 0.400 1.79

βp β (t)

Small 1.06 0.964 0.978 44.9* 60.70* 73.4*

Big 0.912 1.03 1.02 33.6* 39.50* 46.9*

sp s(t)

Small 0.99 0.806 0.821 26.70* 32.2* 39.1*

Big -0.186 -0.198 -0.001 4.36* -4.82* -0.06

hp h(t)

Small -0.198 0.028 0.657 -4.73* 13.3* 27.7*

Big -0.349 0.432 0.771 -7.25* 9.31* 19.9*

R2 adj s(e)

Small 0.940 0.960 0.970 0.655 0.440 0.369

Big 0.890 0.890 0.920 0.752 0.226 0.600

Panel B: Non January Months (1964-2008)

αp α(t) Small 0.067 0.137 0.129 6.58* 17.8* 20.75*

Big 0.146 0.103 0.084 18.7* 9.09* 8.03*

βp β (t)

Small 1.09 0.957 0.998 186* 216* 277*

Big 0.971 0.992 1.07 217* 152* 179*

sp s(t)

Small 0.999 0.804 0.824 111* 7.36* 2.85*

Big -0.206 -0.134 -0.030 -30.1* -13.48* -3.36*

hp h(t)

Small -0.168 0.361 0.640 -15.7* 44.8* 98.2*

Big 0.361 0.365 0.829 -44.3* 30.6* 75.4*

R2 adj s(e)

Small 0.969 0.969 0.979 0.471 0.354 0.286

Big 0.974 0.926 0.938 0.359 0.523 0.483

*significant at the 5 percent level

Page 158: Phd Thesis

142

However, a large company is more likely to use its earnings in ways that generally do

not increase the value of its common stock. Paying dividends to preferred

stockholders is one example. Since large companies are retaining a smaller percentage

of their earnings than the small firms, the common stock is returning less to its

owners. The results suggest that the FF3F works well in January. All the three factors

are significant for all six portfolios except small big portfolio. Based on this result it

can be concluded that the FF3F can be applied to capture the cross sectional variation

of stock returns for the monthly seasonal data in the US market.

5.6 Summary and Conclusion

This chapter summarized the results of application of single factor (CAPM) and

multifactor (FF3F) models of asset pricing for the US data. Based on the results, the

validity of the CAPM cannot be rejected for the US. This model is applicable even in

market crisis situation in the market without any issue. On the other hand, it is

observed that explanatory power of the CAPM increases in the crisis period.

The FF3F is also able to capture the variation of stock returns in the US market. The

regression test conducted to measure the explanatory power generated interesting

results. It demonstrates that the explanatory power of both SMB and HML increase

during crisis periods. Also if the two factors are individually considered the SMB

factor is more powerful than HML in the US market. Based on the results the January

effect is seen in the US market and FF3F model is sensitive to the January effect. Its

explanatory power further improves in January months.

Page 159: Phd Thesis

143

Chapter 6

A Comparative Analysis of the Impact of Market Anomalies

in Sri Lanka and in the US

6.1 Introduction

The previous two chapters examined the behavior of asset pricing models with special

reference to anomalies in relation to data from Sri Lanka and the US. An important

objective of this thesis is to identify whether the findings about the Sri Lankan

markets demonstrated any peculiarities vis-à-vis other more advanced countries. This

objective is achieved by focusing on the US for comparative purposes. This

comparison, which is the main objective of the present chapter, provides a new

perspective on how these models (CAPM and FF3F) operate in developing countries

with emerging markets.

Historically the CAPM and FF3F Models have been developed under some set of

assumptions that are discussed in detail in Chapter 2 and Chapter 3. It is identified

that the validity of these assumptions and theories differ from market to market,

depending on the prevailing economic background of the country. These differences

pose various practical problems in application of the models in emerging markets

which has led academics to question the validity of the assumptions in an emerging

market context (see Chapter 2). The countries in which these markets operate are also

different in various ways; not only in terms of economic and financial environment,

but also in political environment. Therefore, this comparison will be useful for the

investors concerned with investment opportunities and others involved in policy

initiatives. In addition, this comparison will provide more academic value to the

present study by making an invaluable contribution to the existing knowledge in

financial economics.

The rest of the sections of this chapter are organized as follows. Section 6.2

summarizes the general economic outlook of US economy and Sri Lankan economy.

It is important to the understand macroeconomic environment of both countries before

Page 160: Phd Thesis

144

making a detail comparison of the findings. Section 6.3 explains the comparison of

risk and rewards of the Sri Lankan market and US market. The empirical comparison

of findings is carried out in section 6.4. Section 6.5 summarizes all the empirical tests

of the two markets. Section 6.6 concludes the chapter.

6.2 The current economic trends

The comparison envisaged in this chapter warrants an appreciation of economic

analysis in the economy of Sri Lanka vis-à-vis that of the US. The economies of Sri

Lanka and of the US were briefly examined in Section 4.3 and Section 5.2

respectively. The present section, using that material, compares/contrasts the two

economies in a manner that lends to a more holistic appreciation of the work

presented in the rest of this chapter. The focus here is mostly on the recent trends and

the future potential of these economies as such matters have a particular bearing on

the stock market performance.

6.2.1 Sri Lankan and the US economies: a recent snap shot

As previously discussed in early chapters, this study is based on two markets which

belong to two categories of markets; namely, emerging and developed markets.

Therefore, the main features of these economies and their relative position in the

world significant. This kind of analysis is important because, according to MSCI

classification stock markets are categorized in this manner based on the soundness of

the economy prevailing. Understanding the latest macro economic variables is

important as this research generalizes the findings country wise and it suggests some

policy measures for both markets.

Table 6.1 collates the most recent economic data (some of which were presented in

Section 4.3 and Section 5.2 ) for the two countries, along with the respective world

ranking. The table presents data on the Sri Lankan (SL) economy and US economy

are arranged in five columns. The columns two and three present the absolute values

of the respective indicator whereas columns four and five establish the relative

position of each indicator, or the respective country ranking according to the CIA

factbook.

Page 161: Phd Thesis

145

Table 6.1: Comparison of Key Economic Indicators.

Category Absolute value Relative Position in world

SL US SL US

GDP (PPP) $ 96 bn $ 14 tn 69 2

GDP Growth 3.5% -2.6% 54 157

GDP Per capita

(PPP) $ 4,500 $ 46,000 150 11

GDP (by sector)

agri: 12.6%

ind: 29.7%

ser: 57.7%

agri: 1.2%

ind: 21.9%

ser: 76.9%

- -

Labor Force 7.6 mn 154.2 mn 58 4

Unemployment 5.9% 9.3% 54 110

Population Below

Poverty Line 23% 12% - -

Gini Index (2007) 49 45 27 42

Investment – Gross

Fixed (% of GDP) 22.7% 12.3% 64 145

Inflation Rate 3.4% -0.3% 109 20

Value of Publicly

traded Shares $ 8.1 mn

$ 11.74 tn

(2008) 84 1

Current Acc. Bal. $ -1.69 mn $ -419 mn 146 190

FDI received $ 3 bn $ 2.4 tn 115 1

Interest Rate 7.5% 0.5% 35 134

€ per currency 0.0061 0.7338 - - Note: All figures in the table are as at 2009 unless stated otherwise.

Source: CIA World Factbook and the Central Bank of Sri Lanka

Table 6.1 reveals salient features of these economies that may impact the performance

of their stock markets. It is fascinating to note that some indicators/variables place Sri

Lanka above the US, even though its economy is minute (in terms of PPP adjusted

GDP) compared to the US economy. The indicators such as GDP growth,

unemployment, Current Account Balance, growth rate, Investment rate, etc. ranks Sri

Lanka higher than the US. However, the absolute values of economic indicators in the

US are many times larger than those in SL. Shear size and the might of the economy

accounts for this unassailable number one position of the US economy. To put things

in perspective for the comparison envisaged here, the US is in the top position in

publicly traded shares in the world, whereas Sri Lanka is ranked 84th

.

Conversely, another perspective of this comparison is that, after all 2008 was a very

unusual year for the US market. It will be one of reasons for ranking some variables

Page 162: Phd Thesis

146

in better position for Sri Lankan market. A comparison with decade or quarter century

averages will have a different picture. However, Table 6.1 very well demonstrates the

current picture of the key economic variables in both counties.

Moreover, there are some limited similarities across the countries such as the

prominence of the contribution of the service sector. In both countries the industrial

sector takes the second place and agricultural contribution is the least. The similarities

of the sectoral GDP, however, end with these ranking as actual numbers are

substantially different. For instance in the US agriculture contributes a mere 1.2

percent, where as the Sri Lankan economy still substantially depends on agriculture.

In fact when one looks at sectoral employment the reliance on agriculture in Sri Lanka

is much more: the agricultural employment figure for the country (not shown in Table

6.1) is 32.7 percent in 2010.

As shown in the table the interest rate is another important indicator which heavily

influences the performance of financial sector of the economy. It is much higher in SL

(7.5 percent), compared to 0.5 percent for the US. Low interest rates have a thriving

impact on the financial sector; particularly capital market investments. However, the

higher interest rates in SL without doubt have hindered the development of the

investment climate during the past decades. In addition, the exchange rate of US in

2009 was €0.7338/$, whereas in Sri Lanka the rate is €0.0061/Rs. This implies that

the US can gain comparative advantage in foreign trades many times than SL.

Having established the above comparative analysis on the two countries some

important projections can be made on these two countries. This section principally

attempts to brief the current economic status of Sri Lankan economy and US economy

in the light of the main implications of this study. The SL economy dramatically

changed in 1977 with Colombo dumping statist and import substitution policies for

more market and export-oriented policies, including encouragement of foreign

investment. This created an atmosphere where the country is more sensitive to the

fluctuation of macroeconomic factors taking place locally and globally. However, the

country could not get the full dividend of these policy changes for the development of

the country due to the civil war that prevailed in the country for nearly three decades.

Page 163: Phd Thesis

147

Sri Lanka suffered through a vicious civil war from 1983 to 2009 that crippled the

country‘s development. Regardless of the war, Sri Lanka saw GDP growth average

nearly 5% in the last 10 years. Government spending on development and fighting the

LTTE drove the GDP growth to around 6-7% per year in 2006-2008. Growth was

3.5% in 2009, still high despite the world recession. Taking the advantage of the

peaceful environment in the country, now the government has forecasted an economic

growth of 8% in the year 2010. In order to achieve the targeted growth massive

infrastructure development projects are being undertaken by the government.

Among the upcoming projects top priority is given for the reconstruction and

development projects in the north and east. Opening of new ventures in the war -tone

area creates more room for the expansion of the Sri Lankan capital markets. Also,

funding these projects will be difficult, as the government is already faced with high

debt interest payments, a bloated civil service, and high budget deficits. Therefore, the

government needs to seek help from private sector investors. The only effective way

to attract private investors for the development of country is the capital market. There

is also positive sign of the market booming during post war atmosphere. The Sri

Lankan stock market gained over 100% (ASPI) in 2009, one of the best performing

markets in the world. Official foreign reserves improved to more than $5 billion by

November 2009, providing over 6 months of imports cover.15

However, as stated previously in Chapter 4, the 2008-2009 global financial crisis and

recession exposed Sri Lanka's economic vulnerabilities and nearly caused a balance of

payments crisis, which was alleviated by a $2.6 billion IMF standby agreement in

July 2009. But the end of the civil war and the IMF loan restored investors'

confidence and CSE started to perform better than before.

In the same way, the current behaviour of US economy has acquired a new tempo

after the 2008 financial turmoil. The global economic downturn, the sub-prime

mortgage crisis, investment bank failures, falling home prices, and tight credit pushed

15 CIA World Factbook.

Page 164: Phd Thesis

148

the US into a recession by mid-2008. To help stabilize financial markets, the US

Congress established a $700 billion Troubled Asset Relief Program (TARP) in

October 2008. The government used some of these funds to purchase equity in US

banks and other industrial corporations. The US Congress has also passed the

American Recovery and Reinvestment Act. President Obama signed the Act into law

on 17 February 2009.

The economic stimulus contained in the Act totals $787bn, or around 5.5% of the

GDP. Through one-third in tax cuts and two-thirds in increased spending, it is

designed to provide support to the economy over several years, to help ease what

economists expect to be one of the longest and deepest recessions in the post-war

period. Most forecasters expect the package to add around one percentage point to

growth in 2009 and 2010. But it will also push the budget deficit over 9.5% in 2009

and 8% in 2010. This year has got off to a positive start, with data showing a

substantial increase in GDP growth in the fourth quarter of 2009.

The President set out his economic policy plans for the year in his State of the Union

Address in January 2009 - emphasising jobs, financial regulation, and the deficit16

. He

emphasised that increased support for jobs would be a priority in the government

future plans. Due to this crisis the investors‘ confidence decreases in any form of

investment, including capital market. This creates volatility in the stock market. This

ultimately resulted in the accuracy of the predictions of stock markets with the pricing

models.

6.2.2 The stock markets: The key performance indicators

This subsection presents some performance indicators from the Sri Lankan and the

US stock markets and uses them to compare the two markets. Five such indicators are

described here: (1) the number of listed companies, (2) total value of share trading, (3)

price earnings ratio (P/E) and dividend yield, (4) market price indices, and (5) market

16 CIA World FactBook.

Page 165: Phd Thesis

149

capitalization. These indicators are widely used by practitioners and professionals in

measuring the stock market performance. For example, if the number of listed

companies in the market increases, it is often interpreted as an indicator of expansion

of the operational activities of the market.

Table 6.2: Important Performance Indicators of Sri Lankan Market and US Market

Indicators 1997-99 2000-02 2003-05 2006-08

SL US SL US SL US SL US

No. listed

companies 239 2774 238 2411 242 2290 236 2180

Value of share

trading ($bn) 0.26 1155 0.21 10619 0.81 11811 1.01 28180

P/E Ratio 9.4 27.5 8.3 25.2 11.4 NA 10.3 NA

Dividend Yield % 4.3 1.4 5.9 1.2 3.0 NA 3.6 NA

Price Index 624 6193 627 6060 1497 7148 2255 40401

Market Cap ($bn) 1.79 10198 1.36 10525 4.03 12556 6.54 13427

Source: World Federation of Exchanges

As discussed the in previous chapters the CAPM and FF3F attempts to capture the

market and company fundamental factors for the fluctuation of stock returns.

Therefore, this section discusses other company fundamental factors and their

performance that are very much relevant for the current study. For example the

number of listed companies is a key determinant of the size of the market.

Table 6.2 provides statistics of the above five items for the cases of Sri Lanka and the

US. The data collected from the World Federation of Exchanges (WFE) are presented

in three year averages to provide a panoramic view of what happened in these markets

from 1997 to 2008. It seems in case of CSE that there is no big variation in the

number of firms listed throughout the period from 1997 to 2008; it varies from 236 to

242. In the US the number of listed firms is more than 10 times larger than the CSE.

It appears that there is an increasing trend in the total value of share trading in the

CSE during the period. During the period 2006-08 it has increased up to $1.01 billion.

Similarly, the total value of share trading has increased in the US dramatically during

Page 166: Phd Thesis

150

the period same period. It has increased from $1155 billion to $28180 billion during

the periods 1987-2008. This indicates that stock market operations have significantly

increased during these periods in both markets. Conversely, there is no significant

improvement in price earnings ratio and dividend yield during the period in both

countries. The major market portfolios (ASPI and NYSE) show a significant

improvement during the period.

Among the above indicators P/E ratio and the dividend yield are important indicators

of stock market performance. P/E ratio measures the price paid for a share relative to

the annual net income or profit earned by the firm per share. This is considered as the

one of oldest and most frequently used method for valuation and security analysis. In

general a high P/E ratio suggests that investors are expecting higher earnings growth

in the future compared to firms with lower P/E. Thus, as shown in the table, investors

who concentrate on the US market expect more earnings growth in the future when

compared to SL. The data on dividend yield also ratifies this picture.

The above discussions revealed that the performance of the two markets has

significantly improved during the recent past. This is important as this study covers

such a dynamic periods in the two markets. The above analysis will be an ancillary

evidence of the study to determine how the behavior of the model significantly

changes in a dynamic market environment.

6.3 Risk and rewards comparison using summary statistics and

pair-wise correlations

Table 3.6 and Table 3.7 in Chapter 3 provide summary statistics for the six portfolios

constructed for the testing of the FF3F in the CSE and the US respectively. The mean

return of Table 3.6.A represents return for the investors who hold these portfolios for

the 10 year period 1999-2008. During this period all the mean return is positive,

excluding big high portfolios. The standard deviation represents the variability of

mean returns of portfolios. More variability means more risky portfolios; it seems that

there is a positive relationship between the mean return and standard deviation in

moderate number of the portfolios in Sri Lankan market.

Page 167: Phd Thesis

151

Table 3.7 presents the descriptive statistics for the portfolios formed as big and small

in the US market. The results illustrate that the mean returns for the investment

portfolio are positive in all six portfolios and three risk proxies. The statistics in the

US market is also comparable with the results of the Sri Lankan market. At this

juncture in the US market there is a close relationship between mean return and

standard deviation of portfolios. In other words, risk and returns relationship is very

outstandingly visible in the US market, than what is shown in the CSE.

It seems that there is a higher mean return in the Sri Lankan market compared to the

US market. This is largely due to the high risk atmosphere of emerging Sri Lankan

stock market. As previously explicated under the review of previous research in

Chapter 2 the emerging markets are more risky and as a result the investors get more

returns than developed markets. For this reason the emerging markets are more

popular among investors. These markets have now become cash cows for the

international investors. The summary statistics of portfolios reported at this point

unfailing with most of the previous findings of the related studies. Finally it makes

obvious that the investors gain more abnormal returns in emerging markets, than in

developed markets.

The result of the correlation analysis is presented in Table 3.8 for the Sri Lankan

market during full sample periods and other two sub-periods. According to the results

in the CSE only few pair wise combinations are significant at 5% level. The big and

small portfolios are positively correlated with market factor during crisis periods,

whereas its correlation with other portfolios is negative in full sample period and non-

crisis period.

On the other hand, the results shown in Table 3.9 are absolutely different in the US

market. Based on the outcome of the analysis the pair wise correlation gained among

the portfolios are greatly considerable in all the sample periods, including the crisis

period in the US market. There is a high positive correlation among portfolios in the

US market. As portfolio returns are highly correlated to each other, no diversification

benefit is gained from the US market. Conversely, in Sri Lankan market portfolios

Page 168: Phd Thesis

152

are not highly correlated. Hence, this offers investors an opportunity to diversify some

of their risks.

6.4 Market wise comparison of major findings

This section, the most important one in this chapter, offers a comparative angle to

view the key findings of earlier chapters. This chapter examines the soundness of

CAPM and FF3F and compares their comparability with the Sri Lankan data and with

the US data. This comparison is significant as it can, in most cases, be generalized and

looked upon as a comparison of the behavior of asset pricing models across emerging

and developed markets.

6.4.1 Analysis of the Results of the CAPM in CSE and US

As a precursor to the FF3F model, this research examines the soundness of the CAPM

in predicting stock returns for the six portfolios constructed for the testing of the

FF3F. This is an advancement of the techniques used in the literature for the reason

that the early tests on the CAPM are mostly based on individual stocks and time

varying nature of CAPM beta. For example, Groenewold and Fraser (1999)

investigated the time varying behavior of the CAPM beta and concluded that beta is

time varying and non-stationary. In the current study it is established that beta varies

significantly across portfolios. Test result for CAPM in Sri Lankan market is reported

in Table 4.1 in Chapter 4. Based on these results the CAPM is redundant in Sri

Lankan market with the exclusion of small high (SH) portfolios which shows

significant pricing of market factor (ASPI) in all the sample periods, including crisis

period.

In the case of the US, in contrast, the CAPM works very prominently including in

crisis periods (see Table 5.3 in p.129). Market factor is more dominant in the US

market and it is shown that beta is highly significant in all the portfolios. The R2 is

above 65 percent in every period for every portfolio six portfolios. But in case of the

CSE, the value of R2 is low and it is not much higher than 25 percent in majority of

the portfolios. This suggests that the portfolios of stocks in Sri Lankan market are

riskless and proportionately exposed to market risk, when compared with the US

Page 169: Phd Thesis

153

market. This indicates that other firm specific factors (unsystematic risk) are more

prominent in the market in pricing stocks in CSE. The results also re-confirm that the

CAPM is illogical in emerging markets as suggested by the current empirical

evidences available in finance literature.

Figure 6.1: Relationship between CAPM betas and excess return of portfolios. The

solid line represents the returns of portfolios in the CSE and the US; the perforated

line the estimated beta values. The square bullets () represent values for the US. The

horizontal axis is common to all panels and can be read off Panel C.

Page 170: Phd Thesis

154

Figure 6.1 shows the relationship between beta and mean return among portfolios in

the Sri Lankan market and the US market. Each graph has four lines representing beta

and mean return for the two markets. Panels A, B and C in the table stand for the

different sample periods. The figure shows that beta for the CSE fluctuate much

across the six portfolios in all three panels. The beta for small high (SH) portfolio is

high in the CSE during full sample period and crisis period, but is close to zero in

non-crisis period. It implies that SH portfolios become more risky in the CSE during

crisis periods. According to the evidence in the figure, higher risk in SH is not always

rewarded by the higher returns which contradicts the notion of positive risk-return

relationship.

Interestingly it seems that there is no significant deviation in mean excess return in the

two markets even though the two has beta values that deviate much. However, it

seems exceptionally different behavior in small portfolios that is the beta and return

moves positively in these portfolios. This result is consistent with Ho-Chan and

Huang (2000) who suggests that CAPM is constant with the data in the low-risk, but

inconsistent with the data in the high risk occasions. The analysis conducted here

uncovers important findings that the theory of risk and return works well in the US

market, but it is not seen in the CSE.

In summary, it shows that the portfolio return in the US market varies in relation to

the changes in beta. But in the Sri Lankan market the portfolio return is not followed

by variation in beta. In the Sri Lankan market there is a big variation in beta across six

portfolios. On the other hand, the irregular behavior of the risk and return is a major

barrier for the investors to forecast their future risk and return trade off in the CSE.

6.4.2 Comparison of the results of the FF3F

This sub-section attempts to accomplish a cross comparison of the findings related to

Sri Lankan and US markets based on the FF3F. This comparative analysis relies on

the results of multi factor regression tests of the FF3F that are summarized in Table

4.2 in Chapter 4 and in Table 5.4 in Chapter 5 for the CSE and the US respectively.

The CSE results in the Table 4.2 shows that the FF3F does not work effectively in the

Sri Lankan market. It can also be seen that the market factor is not significant in

Page 171: Phd Thesis

155

almost all the periods, including non-crisis periods. The exceptions are SH and BH

portfolios. These results are more pronounced when the model is applied to the full

sample and to the crisis period. Table 4.2 very clearly shows that the market factor is

significant only for the small high (SH) portfolios and big high (BH) portfolios in

both periods.

When evidences on other two fundamental factors of the FF3F are considered in CSE,

it shows that SMB and HML are significant in the majority of portfolios and in all the

sample periods as shown in Table 4.2. These results substantiate that only SMB and

HML factors can capture the variation of stock returns in the Sri Lankan Market,

while market portfolio is not a significant factor in determining the stock return in the

Sri Lankan Market.

These results are evident of the semi strong form of efficiency as discovered by

Eugene Fama in his PhD thesis. Semi-strong efficiency implies that share prices

adjust to publicly available new information very rapidly. Both SMB and HML

factors of the FF3F are constructed based on publicly available information. These

results may be due to the fact of the semi-strong features of the Sri Lankan market.

Another point is that transaction cost is very much higher in the Sri Lanka compared

to the US. Due to high transaction cost Sri Lankan market is operationally inefficient.

In the Sri Lanka market majority of the investors are small investors as illustrated in

Figure 4.2. The high tractions cost limits their trading and ultimately the liquidity

position of the investors. But, in the US market the investors are very big investors

and the transaction cost of the US is lower relative to SL. This might affect the

performance of CAPM and FF3F. Moreover brokerage fees and SEC fees is about 3%

in Sri Lanka, compared to which the feeds in developed countries such as the US is

low. Also, high liquid firms (frequently trading) are liable to pay less brokerage fee

therefore; their cost of capital is lower resulting in higher returns for the stocks.

The results of the test of three factor model for the US market are presented in Table

5.4. As shown in the results, the Fama and French Model works well in the US market

in all the sample periods of crisis period. All the parameters of all three factors are

Page 172: Phd Thesis

156

statistically significant at 5% level. These results suggest that the US market has

efficient market features as the market factor is significant.

Figure 6.2: Multi factor beta of small and big portfolios. The perforated lines plot the estimated

beta values. The square bullets () represent values for the US. The horizontal axis is common to

all panels and can be read off Panel C.

-1

0

1

2

3

Mult

i F

acto

r B

eta

Panel A : Full Sample Period

-2

0

2

4

Mult

i F

acto

r B

eta

Panel B : Crisis Period

0

2

4

6

SL SM SH BL BM BH

Mult

i F

acto

r B

eta

Panel C : Non - crisis Period

CSE US

Figure 6.2 shows the fluctuating pattern of multi factor betas of the six portfolios of

CSE and US markets during three periods. It is very prominently seen in all three

panels (A, B and C) that the multi factor beta for the US market is constant through

time across portfolios. In other words, there is no high variability in market risk (multi

Page 173: Phd Thesis

157

factor beta) among big and small portfolios in the US market. However, the market

beta for CSE portfolios shows a high fluctuation across portfolios. It shows that multi

factor beta of big low portfolios is relatively lower in all the sample periods in the

CSE as shown in all three panels. Throughout crisis situation Small High portfolios

has a declining beta, while the other two periods (panels A and C) demonstrate an

increasing trend.

This kind of behavior of beta suggests that the market risk of the CSE can be

minimized by diversification of portfolios in combination with small and big

portfolios. This result clashes with the finance theory of risk and return. The theory

says that the market risk (systematic risk) cannot be diversified away by way of

diversification. However, it seems there is a constant beta among portfolios in US

market. This result is consistent with the theory and shows that in US market

systematic risk is common to all portfolios. Thus, it can be concluded that irrespective

of crisis periods, the portfolio diversification theory works well in the US market but

it does not work properly in the Sri Lankan market.

6.4.3 Comparison of explanatory power of SMB and HML

For the purpose of examining the individual power of the SMB and HML factors in

the FF3F model, a break up analysis is conducted for each time period for both

markets. Table 4.3 presented in Chapter 4 shows the test results for the CSE. It

explains that SMB is more powerful in explaining the variation of stock returns than

HML in the CSE. It can be seen prominently during full sample periods and non-crisis

periods. Both factors are significant in full sample period and non-crisis periods in the

table. During the crisis periods none of the factors are significant in the Sri Lankan

market.

In the US market, both factors (SMB and HML) are equally influential in explaining

stock returns. There is no significant difference in the explanatory power of SMB and

HML in crisis period, when contrasted with the other two periods. In addition, the R2

values are higher in the three factor model (MKT, SMB and HML) in the US.

However, it declines when two factors are applied in the model. This suggests that the

market factor is more powerful than SMB and HML in the US market. The analysis of

Page 174: Phd Thesis

158

R2 resulting from regression equations (4.1 and 4.2) describes this phenomenon

succinctly.

Table 6.3: Measuring Explanatory Power of SMB and HML

Full Sample Crisis period Non-crisis

CSE

SMB-Average R2

0.2388 0.2106 0.2213

HML-Average R2

0.1766 0.1726 0.1780

US

SMB-Average R2

0.8833 0.9156 0.8463

HML-Average R2 0.8316 0.8356 0.8261

Table 6.3 summarizes the estimated R2 values for equations 4.1 and 4.2. The R

2 values

present in the table are averages of all six portfolios. It shows that the R2 for the SMB

is greater than HML in the Sri Lankan market in all the three periods. It indicates that

the SMB is more sensitive than HML in explaining portfolio returns of the US. For

the US also the average R2 value for SMB is higher than HML for all three periods. In

US SMB is more powerful as similar to the CSE. In the US market it seems that the

explanatory power of SMB has greatly increased during crisis period than other

periods. The R2 is 0.9156 which is the highest in the table among others.

It follows that the explanatory power of SMB is more in both markets, while in the

US this effect is even more pronounced during a crisis period. These findings imply

that the significance of factors in the FF3F vary time to time with the changes in the

general market condition in the economy. Thus, the investment decisions should not

be influenced by one period test of the FF3F, but it is sensible to test the model with

different categories of data series. One interesting conclusion here is the SMB is more

sensitive in the model in both markets indicating the size factor is more dominant in

explanting portfolio returns by way of the FF3F model.

In addition to the analysis in Table 6.3 a closer examination of the behavior of the

SMB is shown in Figure 6.3. The figure shows that SMB loadings in the CSE are

close to zero in all most all the portfolios. Conversely, in case of the US the SMB

Page 175: Phd Thesis

159

loadings for small portfolios significantly deviate from zero and have positive

loadings whereas in the big portfolios are close to zero and have negative loadings.

The movement of SMB among portfolios is similar across all the three sample periods

as shown in Panels A, B and C. This suggests that the explanatory power of SMB is

not sensitive to the economic crisis. On the other hand, the negative loadings of SMB

on BL, BM and BH suggest that the size factor has a negative impact on the

movement of portfolio returns.

Figure 6.3: Analysis of SMB Loading. The perforated lines with circular bullets (Ο) plot the

estimated SMB values for CSE. The solid line with square bullets () represent SMB values for

the US. The horizontal axis is common to all panels and can be read off Panel C.

-0.5

0

0.5

1

1.5

SM

B

Panel A: Full Sample Period

-0.5

0

0.5

1

1.5

SM

B

Panel B: Crisis Period

-0.5

0

0.5

1

1.5

SL SM SH BL BM BH

SM

B

Panel C: Non-Crisis Period

SMB Loading -CSE SMB Loading-US

Page 176: Phd Thesis

160

Figure 6.4: Analysis of HML Loading. The perforated lines with circular bullets (Ο) plot the

estimated HML values for CSE. The solid line with square bullets () represent HML values for

the US. The horizontal axis is common to all panels and can be read off Panel C.

-0.5

0

0.5

1

HM

L

Panel A: Full Sample Period

-0.5

0

0.5

1

HM

L

Panel B: Crisis Period

-0.5

0

0.5

1

SL SM SH BL BM BH

HM

L

Panel C: Non-Crisis Period

HML Loading-CSE HML Loading-US

Similarly, Figure 6.4 depicts the relationship between HML and portfolio returns of

the CSE and the US for the full sample, crisis and non-crisis periods. There is a

considerable variation in HML loading in the US while it is more stable in the case of

the CSE. In other words, the impact of HML changes with the portfolios in the US

market, but it is not the case in the CSE. It seems an increasing trend of HML from

BL portfolio to BH portfolios in the US market in all the periods. Interestingly BL

shows negative loading on HML which suggests that BE/ME factor is negatively

related to the movement of portfolio returns in BL portfolios during crisis and non-

Page 177: Phd Thesis

161

crisis periods. However, in case of CSE, BE/ME factor is equally influencing for the

fluctuation of portfolio returns across all the sample periods.

In summary, Figure 6.1, Figure 6.2, Figure 6.3 and Figure 6.4 explain the inter-links

of the estimated coefficients of the CAPM and FF3F for all the sample periods in both

markets. When this evidence is perused collectively, it reveals a peculiar pattern of

how the various factors—MKT (β), SMB (s) and HML (h)—play out in the two

markets. In case of CSE β fluctuates much across portfolios in the CAPM and the

FF3F. However, SMB and HML loadings are mostly constant across the portfolios in

the CSE.

Conversely, in case of US, CAPM beta and FF3F beta are mostly constant across the

portfolios in all the periods, whereas SMB and HML loadings are highly fluctuating

among the portfolios in all the periods. This gives an important message to the

portfolio managers and investors about the behavior of the risk in the market. The

concept of systematic risk and unsystematic risk is very specifically shown in the US

market. But, it is not applicable to the CSE as the beta factor is highly fluctuating

across portfolios. If that concept is applicable, betas must be constant among the

portfolios. In case of the CSE however, SMB and HML can be identified as common

risk factors for all small and big portfolios. Thus, due attention must be paid to these

recommendations by the investors when they are picking up stocks into their

portfolios.

6.4.4 Differences and Similarities of January effect in both markets.

Table 6.4 reports the average of portfolio returns for the three sub-sample series;

namely January, 1st week of January and Non-January for the CSE and the US. The

average returns represent the average of the six portfolios in each period. It

demonstrates that the mean return of portfolios is substantively higher in January

when compared with the other Non-January periods in both markets. The average

mean return for the first week of January is even greater than other weeks of the same

months.

Page 178: Phd Thesis

162

Table 6.4: January Seasonality of CSE and US

January

1st week of

January Non-January

Average Mean Return-CSE 0.117 0.246 0.088

Average Mean Return-US 0.635 0.972 0.203

This apparently suggests that the January effect is valid in both markets. However, for

a valid conclusion for the January effect more analysis should be undertaken. As

explained in previous explanations several factors are attributable to this behavior in

the markets. Researchers have found that the turn of year effect significantly

influences the higher return in January. The tax loss selling hypothesis can be one

more reason for the anomalous return in January however; it is not applicable to CSE

due to the fact that capital gain tax rule does not exist in Sri Lanka.

Table 6.5: Sensitivity of FF3F to January Effect

MKT SMB HML R2

CSE

January -1.889 0.020 0.024 0.501

Non-January 0.351 0.009 0.0033 0.4381

US

January 0.994 0.372 0.2235 0.9283

Non-January 1.013 0.3761 0.398 0.9591

As an additional investigation to the work volume of FF3F the sensitivity of FF3F is

examined. Table 6.5 summarizes the regression results of FF3F with January and

Non-January data series for both markets. The values reported in the table contain the

average of the regression coefficients of the FF3F model and the average R2 of each

of the test presented in Chapter 4 and Chapter 5. If coefficients are closely examined

in the CSE it seems the SMB and HML coefficients of the CSE are close to zero.

However; in the US the coefficients are different from zero largely. When the R2 takes

into consideration in case of CSE, the explanatory power of the FF3F is more

powerful in January as exhibit in the value of R2. Similarly, in case of US average

mean return is much higher in January than other months (0.63) and for the 1st week

Page 179: Phd Thesis

163

of January it further increased to 0.972. However, based on the values in Table 5.7 in

Chapter 5 it is found that FF3F in the US is highly sensitive to the January effect.

6.5 Summary of the findings

Table 6.6 presents the major findings of this study for the CSE and the US. However,

no detail discussions will be done as the findings of the tests are discussed

comprehensively in the relevant chapters. As shown in the first column in Table 6.6

the study has focused on six empirical tests in both markets including CAPM and

FF3F tests. The √ mark indicates the gravity of explanatory power and the fitness of

the test. As the number of √ marks in a cell increases the gravity of explanatory power

and the soundness of the results also increase.

It seems that the predictive power of all most all tests is very low in the CSE when

compared to the US in all the tests. However, the FF3F outperforms the CAPM in

CSE and in US both CAPM and FF3F work satisfactorily. It is interesting to note that

the explanatory power of the SMB and HML decreases in the CSE during crisis

period and for the US market their power increases in crisis period when compared to

other periods.

The test results of the FF3F with January weekly data yields moderately similar

results to the other periods. However, for the CSE the explanatory power of the SMB

and HML has declined and no significant dissimilarity is found in the US market.

The mean return of 1st week of January is significantly higher in both markets.

Page 180: Phd Thesis

164

Table 6.6: Gravity of major findings

Empirical Tests

CSE US

Full

Sample

Crisis Non-

Crisis

Full

Sample

Crisis Non-

Crisis

CAPM

CAPM-Beta √ √ √ √ √√ √ √√ √ √√√

FF3F

Multifactor Beta √ √ √ √√ √ √√ √ √ √ √

SMB √√√ √√ √ √ √ √√ √ √√√ √ √ √

HML √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √√ √√√ √ √√

Power of SMB &

HML

SMB √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √√√ √√ √

HML √ √ √ √ √ √ √√ √√ √

Jan. Effect (FF3F)

Multifactor Beta √ N/A N/A √√√ N/A N/A

SMB √ √ N/A N/A √√ √ N/A N/A

HML √ √ N/A N/A √√ √ N/A N/A

Non-Jan (FF3F )

Multifactor Beta √ N/A N/A √√√ N/A N/A

SMB √ √ N/A N/A √√ √ N/A N/A

HML √ √ N/A N/A √√ √ N/A N/A

Mean Return

January √ √ N/A N/A √√ N/A N/A

1st Week of January √ √ √ N/A N/A √√ √ N/A N/A

Non-January √ N/A N/A √ N/A N/A

Note: Number of √ indicates the power of Predictability

N/A: Not Applicable

Page 181: Phd Thesis

165

6.6 Conclusion

This chapter effectively established a comparison and a revision of the key findings of

Chapter 4 and 5 within the dichotomous framework of emerging/developed markets.

The main objective of this chapter is to encompass a cross comparison on the practical

modalities of the major findings of the key models of CAPM and FF3F. It is observed

that there are some similarities and dissimilarities of the behavior of the models in

these two markets. There are some considerable differences in the behavior of the

models in crisis and non-crisis settings, both in the CSE and the US markets. The

evidences also suggest that the asset pricing models work effectively in developed

markets and in emerging markets these models do not work effectively. Furthermore,

evidences revealed that the dynamic nature of the predictions of the models is affected

by the financial crisis in both in the CSE and in the US.

Page 182: Phd Thesis

166

Chapter 7

Summary of the Findings and Conclusion

7.1 Introduction

This important and final chapter summarizes the work presented in the previous

chapters of this thesis and discusses its implications for public policy on stock market

operations based on the country specific findings. It also highlights the contribution of

this research for the benefit of scholars in the field of asset pricing. This chapter also

examines whether the research questions stated in Chapter 1 are answered in the

findings of the various empirical tests of this study. The thesis concludes by proposing

areas for future research, giving due acknowledgement to the limitations stated at the

beginning of the research.

7.2 Summary of key findings

The foremost objective of this study is to investigate the validity of single factor

models and multi factor assets pricing models in predicting the variation of stock

returns in Sri Lankan and US market, with special focus on two prominent models

popularly known as the CAPM and the FF3F. The distinctive feature and the key

objective of this research is that it investigates the predictability of asset returns on

three different periods that are objectively identified as full sample period, stock

market crisis period (high volatile periods) and non-crisis period (low volatile). The

other supplementary extension of this research is the testing of the January effect with

the same portfolios constructed for the purpose of FF3F for both CSE and US

markets.

The outcome of the test revealed that the CAPM cannot be used to predict differences

in stock returns in the CSE effectively, whereas the findings confirm that the CAPM

is an applicable model in predicting the differences in stock returns in the US market.

The current study also finds one important result on the behavior of the CAPM in the

US market, which is the model that appears to be linear as evidence confirms. In other

Page 183: Phd Thesis

167

words, the high beta is followed by higher returns and vise versa in most of the

portfolios in the US market.

The empirical evidence also confirms that the FF3F model outperforms the CAPM in

the CSE. It is because out of three factors in the model only SMB and HML are

significant in most of the cases. Conversely, findings suggest that FF3F effectively

works in the US and it completely explains the differences of stock returns. The test

outcome of the model on crisis data reveals some significant differences in the

behavior of the models in the period market that are exposed to the economic crisis. It

is found in the empirical analysis that the FF3F model is sensitive to January effect.

Based on the findings it seems that the impact of the January effect is moderate in the

CSE, while it is quite significant in the US market.

7.3 Answers for research questions

In addition to the main and secondary objectives that are addressed in the previous

section, the study also has six specific research questions. It is important to identify

and whether and how the study has answered these questions. Answers for the six

questions are identified as ancillary objectives of the current study.

The first question aims to address whether size (SMB) and Book-to-Market (HML)

factors would hold and work well in the Sri Lankan market and in the US market

during market crisis periods. In case of the CSE, even though the FF3F cannot fully

explained the differences of stock returns in the CSE, both SMB and HML factors are

able to significantly explain the variation of portfolio returns in the CSE. The findings

suggest that SMB and HML are convincing fundamental factors in explanting stock

returns during market crisis periods and non-crisis periods in the US. Moreover, the

predictive power of these two factors declined during the crisis period, indicating that

the model is sensitive to the economic crisis and volatility in the stock markets of

these two countries.

The second research question is ―Does the FF3F model outperforms the CAPM in

Market crisis period and Non-crisis period?‖ The investigated results elaborate that

the FF3F can capture the variability of stock returns missed by the CAPM. The FF3F

Page 184: Phd Thesis

168

model outperforms the CAPM in the Sri Lankan market. Out of the three factors only

SMB and HML are able to capture the variation of stock returns in CSE. Here the

market factor (MKT) is not able to explain the stock returns as the majority of the

estimated MKT coefficients are not significant in each of the three sample periods. In

contrast, the FF3F is found to be more applicable to the case of the US. All the

coefficients representing the three factors in the FF3F model are highly significant in

all the sub periods in the US market. These results confirm that the FF3F is a valid

model in capturing the CAPM anomalies in the US market.

The third question which this study addresses is ―whether the size factor (SMB)

dominates BE/ME (HML) during crisis periods and normal periods or not‖. In order

to deal with this question separate tests are conducted with each factor, along with the

market factors for each market. The results of Sri Lankan market reveal that the SMB

(size) factor is more powerful in explaining stock returns in CSE, both in crisis and

non crisis periods. Interestingly the test result for the US market also shows a similar

result, the explanatory power of the SMB is more powerful than HML in most of the

portfolios. When the SMB factor is included into the model the R2 improves

significantly in the US market. In summary it confirms that size (SMB) effect is one

of the momentous anomalies in explanting the variation in stock prices in the CSE and

in the US.

The fourth question is whether the CAPM is a valid explanation of the differences in

stock returns during crisis and non crisis periods. This question was addressed by

testing whether the FF3F portfolio returns were explained by the CAPM. The result of

the test is not compatible between the two markets. In the Sri Lankan market it is

found that the beta factor is significant only for small number of portfolios (SH and

BH) which signals that the CAPM is not a valid indicator in predicting the returns of

the most of the portfolios formed as big and small portfolios. The results of the US

market on CAPM indicate that the model works favorably for the validation of

CAPM. It is because the beta factor is highly significant for all the portfolios in full

sample, both in crisis and non-crisis periods.

Page 185: Phd Thesis

169

The fifth question is ―Does January effect prevail during crisis periods and non crisis

periods in big and small portfolios?‖ This is an additionally conducted assessment to

measure the sensitivity of January months‘ high return on the predictive power of the

FF3F. It is generally known that January returns for stocks is higher than other

months due to several reasons such as January effect, new year effect etc. The results

reveal that the model is not sensitive to the January month‘s returns in the Sri Lankan

market. However, in US market higher mean return is reported in all the portfolios in

January that confirms the existence of January effect in the US. In the Sri Lankan

market a significant value of mean return not being reported in January indicates the

non-existence of January effect in the Sri Lankan market. The results of the FF3F

analysis with January weekly returns reveal that the FF3F is sensitive to the January

effect.

The final question is whether the answers to the above 1 to 4 questions are sensitive to

the market crisis. The findings of the study confirm that both the CAPM and the FF3F

are sensitive to market crises and significant differences in the models and the

variables within the models are discovered.

7.4 Country specific findings in the Sri Lankan market

The Sri Lankan stock market is minute by global standards and has received less

attention from the researchers. In view of filling this drawback, the investigator

conducted this research in the area of asset pricing, with special focus on CAPM and

FF3F Model in the CSE. It is also found that the results of the current research are

consistent with the handful of previous studies available on the market, whereas some

inconsistencies are found in some areas of the findings. However, most of the findings

of this research are exceptional to this study merely because the research approach is

very unique in this thesis. One of the major arguments of the research is to investigate

the validity/invalidity of the CAPM and the three factor model under crisis and non-

crisis periods in the CSE.

The impact of market crisis on CAPM measured by beta suggests that the systematic

risk does not significantly influence the explanation of future stock returns in the

Page 186: Phd Thesis

170

CSE. This finding strongly contradicts with the theoretical recommendation of the

original work of Sharpe (1964), Lintner (1965) and Black (1972), and with later

empirical studies which test the CAPM on developed markets. Section 2.4 (see page

30) outlines some of these works. These findings imply that the beta coefficient alone

cannot provide an efficient mechanism of examining and predicting excess stock

returns in CSE as an emerging market.

The results derived from the FF3F test reveal that the FF3F model outperforms the

CAPM in the Sri Lankan market both in crisis and non-crisis periods. It is found that

out of three factors, the market factor (MKT) is not significant for the majority of

portfolios, as well as for few SMB and HML slope coefficients. This is a common

finding for all the sample periods. However, when it is compared with the CAPM, the

inclusion of SMB and HML factors to the regression improves the quality and the

reliability of the model in terms of increased predictive power of R2 and their

significance at 5% level.

Another significant finding is that the average absolute pricing error (intercept) of the

CAPM is more extensive than the FF3F model. The statistics also further confirm that

the CAPM is dominated by the FF3F in the Sri Lankan stock market. Several factors

can be attributed for the invalidity of CAPM in the CSE. The most profound fact is

the invalidity of the assumptions in emerging markets such as the CSE. For example;

in CAPM it is assumed that there are no transactions cost or private information.

Therefore, diversified portfolio includes all traded investments held in proportion to

their market value. However, in emerging markets like the CSE transition cost is very

high and leakage of corporate information is a frequent occurrence.

The two models (CAPM and FF3F) tested in Chapter 4 and Chapter 5 demonstrates

the need for new models for the CSE in order to capture returns determinants of the

portfolios of assets. Further, most of the empirical work in finance is based on

efficient market assumption conducted in developed markets headed by the US and

the UK. Their appeal to the empirical modelers is perhaps that they are more likely to

be consistent with these fundamental assumptions. The flip side of this is that the

emerging market studies, including the Sri Lankan study conducted here, may find

Page 187: Phd Thesis

171

that these models are not able to fit the data precisely because the assumptions are not

held.

7.5 Country specific findings in the US Market

This section summarizes the important findings of chapter five which represents the

analysis of the findings of the US market. Among the important findings it is

discovered that the CAPM is a valid model in predicting the excess returns of

portfolios in the US market both in crisis and non-crisis period. The market factor

(MKT) is highly significant in all the periods. This discovery is unfailing with the

theory developed by Sharpe (1964), Lintner (1965) and Black (1972) and several

other empirical studies (cited in chapter 2) conducted in the US and other markets.

The extraordinary attribute of this research is the testing of the CAPM with the

portfolios opposed to individual stocks that reduce the dimensionality of the results.

In addition, these portfolios represent broad asset classes that follow popular

investment style in the US market.

Furthermore, the test results confirm that the FF3F model works effectively in the US

market during non-crisis period and crisis period. All the three risk factors of the

model are highly significant in each period. It is interesting to note that in the US

market similar to the Sri Lankan market, the SMB is more powerful than HML in

explaining portfolio returns of small and big portfolios. Moreover, interestingly the

pair wise correlation test reveals that the portfolio return of the US market is highly

correlated with each other. It implies that the diversification of portfolios in this

market does not persuade the desires of the investors which is the diminution of risk

by diversification. The computation of the correlation between each pair of stocks is

virtually impossible, therefore this portfolio approach is recommended for measuring

the correlation effect of the stocks in the market.

The summary statistics shown in Chapter 5 demonstrate that the mean return of the

portfolios is remarkably higher in January than in other months in almost all the

portfolios. In addition, summary statistics show a positive relationship between mean

Page 188: Phd Thesis

172

return and standard deviation of small and big portfolios suggesting the validity of the

risk and return relationship in the US market.

Nevertheless, there is no guarantee that a characteristic that has been proven

significant in specific market and during specific time periods could be a competent

indicator in different markets or time periods. Thus, investors should not expect these

research results to work perfectly in the real world investment decision making.

Rather, they should use these findings as a guide for their own investment strategies

and prepare to live with the results, whatever they may turn out to be in different

markets from time to time.

7.6 Contribution of this thesis

This thesis has made a significant contribution to scholarship in asset pricing and its

anomalies, and as well as contribution to the policy and practice related to the Sri

Lankan stock market and the US market. It has systematically developed an argument

on unique attributes of the CAPM and the FF3F in crisis and non-crisis environments

in the market.

The most significant contribution of this study is the validation of the CAPM and the

FF3F in capturing the variation of stock returns in the CSE and the US market. The

findings to this investigation reveal the important and unique behavior of the models

which can be identified as the contribution of this research to scholarship in finance.

It was revealed in the literature review that the testing of the CAPM for the portfolio

of assets has not been undertaken by the previous researchers in CSE. Breaking this

gap this study investigated the validity of the CAPM using FF3F portfolios in

predicting portfolio expected returns in the CSE. It is found that the CAPM is not

compelling in predicting the portfolio returns in the CSE. This can be identified as

one of major contributions to the body of knowledge in asset pricing in the CSE.

In addition, further investigation into the previous literature revealed that no study has

attempted to validate the CAPM in market crisis periods for the CSE. This is also

identified as one of major contributions of the thesis. For the separation of the crisis

Page 189: Phd Thesis

173

periods from the long series of data, the ICSS algorithm of Inclan and Tiao (1994)

was applied for the first time in order to identify volatility breaks in the markets. As

ICSS was applied for the first time, this can also be considered as one of noteworthy

contributions of this thesis. Here the ICSS can be recognized as an effective tool in

identifying market crisis periods in almost all the historical crises that coincide with

the breakpoints identified from this test. Empirical results confirm that the CAPM is

not applicable even in the market crisis periods in the CSE.

On the other hand, to the best of the researcher‘s knowledge, no early studies are

available on the FF3F in the CSE. Contributing to this literature gap this study

investigated the model in the CSE and found that the FF3F can better explain the

expected portfolio returns than what is seen in the CAPM. Similar to the CAPM, the

FF3F model is investigated on crisis periods. Based on the results some significant

differences in the behavior of the models during crisis periods are established.

The January effect is identified as a pervasive stock market anomaly and this study

examines its impact on portfolios of stocks. This is also one of significant

contributions of the current study for the CSE.

Further expanding the scope of the study, all the steps in the CSE are reproduced in

the US market as a benchmark for the comparison purposes of the findings. Unlike

the CSE, there is a large volume of studies on CAPM and FF3F based on the US

market. Importantly, the inventive empirical studies of these two models are also

based on the US market. However, the current study contributes to the US market in

three ways. Firstly, use of weekly data for the testing of both the CAPM and the

FF3F. Secondly validation of both CAPM and FF3F for the market crisis periods and

non-crisis periods in the US is also unique. Finally, measuring the impact of January

effect on the behavior of portfolios return and sensitivity of the FF3F for the January

effect in the US has not being done before.

7.7 Policy implications of the findings

The investigator anticipates that this research will contribute to the deliberations of

policy makers, scholars, investors, fund managers and industry experts. The findings

Page 190: Phd Thesis

174

of this research suggest that the different investment policies must be implemented by

the investors and fund managers separately for market crisis and non-crisis periods as

significant differences are found in the models.

Asset pricing models primarily concern the estimation of required rate of return or

cost of capital for a firm. In addition, the CAPM and the FF3F are the theoretical

representation of the behavior of financial markets and can be used as a tool for

estimating firms‘ cost of capital. Despite their limitations, financial managers heavily

relied on the estimations of these two models for decision making purposes. In the

CSE the FF3F can to some extent accurately estimate the cost of capital, whereas cost

of capital estimates with CAPM does not derive the real cost of capital. Thus, there is

a possibility of making incorrect capital budgeting decisions that hinders the firm

value largely. However, in the US market, both CAPM and FF3F will possibly draw

precise cost of capital for the firm. Conversely, Fama and French (1996) find that the

FF3F signals higher costs of equity for distressed industries than for strong industries,

largely because the distressed industries have higher loadings on HML. Thus, the

findings imply that the financial managers should ascertain the predictive power of

the models before they are applied for the corporate financial decision makings.

Furthermore, the explanatory returns on SMB and HML are not motivated by

prediction about state variables of concern on investors. For example, some studies

which focus on economic conditions are Chan and Hsieh (1985) and Fama and French

(1995). They found that small size firms and low book-to-market firms are risky,

while distressed firms are more prone to default during adverse economic conditions.

Therefore, they must provide relatively high risk premium during declining economic

conditions. In this research, it is found that small stocks yield higher risk premium

(more return for bearing more risk). Thus, these portfolios are favorable investment

for the investors who expect more returns with higher returns. The investment

advisory firms and other agencies should implement their policies accordingly.

The results of this study are multidimensional and significant differences in the

behavior of excess return of portfolios were found in every sub-period. The findings

Page 191: Phd Thesis

175

suggest that a significant and consistent size and book-to-market effect prevails only

during expansive monetary policy periods, but not during restrictive periods.

This view supports findings of Fama and French (1995) and Chan and Hsieh (1985)

who examined the effects of Book-to-market and size in a general asset pricing model

using several markets, including the UK market. They conclude that Book-to-market

and size effects are international in character and strong under the general model and

against a variety of alternative macroeconomic and financial conditioning variables.

According to Reinganum (1983), the three-factor model is useful in applications and

he found that the size-adjusted average returns are higher for the NYSE stocks than

NASDAQ stocks. NYSE stocks have higher loadings on HML and it leads to higher

predicted returns. Carhart (1997) finds that the three factor model provides sharper

evaluations of the performance of mutual funds than the CAPM.

7.8 Suggested areas for future research

This thesis provides the basis for many avenues of future research. First, the largest

limitation of this research is probably the short sample period, especially in the Sri

Lankan market, due to the limitation of availability of the trading information in the

market. The possibility of examining a longer period would also provide the models

with more statistical power. Unlike in the Sri Lankan market, this can be executed

with some other market that has longer series of data.

The scope of this study is limited only for the three factor model and the January

effect as the CAPM anomalies in the Sri Lankan market and the US market applies

two set of data as crisis and non-crisis periods. In future, the researchers can examine

the validity of other anomalies such as E/P, C/P under crisis and non-crisis set of data

series. The sample countries can also be expanded with more emerging markets.

Examining other countries would be more desirable to provide support for the

conclusion of this thesis. It would also bring satisfactory results to the model if the

portfolio return is predicted in the Sri Lankan market with other economic variables

like inflation, oil prices, GDP growth, etc. This will enable to avoid the rejection of

the model resulting from adopting incorrect variables. Finally, this research has

Page 192: Phd Thesis

176

examined simply the January effect of the portfolio that represented big and small

firms. As an extension to this, it is recommended to test other calendar anomalies with

the same portfolios.

7.9 Final remarks

This rare attempt at modeling emerging market stock returns revealed numerous

challenges at the level of data preparation and fitting models such as the CAPM and

the FF3F. Undoubtedly these challenges partly explain the lack of empirical works for

these markets. Even when one overcomes these challenges, as it done here, the

interpretation of the results needs to be done with extra care, as the assumptions that

underlie these models become very shaky when applied to emerging markets. These

challenges, therefore, highlight the need to revisit finance theories that can be

meaningfully used for the analysis of these markets. However, from a cost benefit

point of view, given the minuscule size of these markets, it is not clear whether such

an effort would attract the academics of developed countries.

Page 193: Phd Thesis

177

References

Abraham, B. and W. W. S. Wei (1984). "Inferences about the parameters of a time

series model with changing variance." Metrika 31(1): 183-194.

Aggarwal, C., C. Inclan and L. Ricardo (1995). Volatility in Emerging Stock Markets.

European Financial Association, School of Business, Georgetown University,

Washington.

Aggrawal and K. Tandon (1994). "Anomalies or Illusions? Evidence from Stock

Markets in Eighteen Countries." Journal of International Money and Finance 13: 83-

106.

Ang, A. and G. Bekaert (2002). "International asset allocation with regime shifts."

Review of Financial Studies 15(4): 1137.

Angrist and W. Stanley (1991). "Bucking the Trend: Will the U.S Dollar Once Again

Follow January Effect." Wall Street Journal 31(January): Section C,3.

Bailey, W. and Y. P. Chung (1995). "Exchange Rate Fluctuations, Political Risk, and

Stock Market Returns." Journal of Financial and Quantitative Analysis 30(4): 541-

561.

Banz, R. W. (1981). "The relationship between return and market value of common

stocks." Journal of financial economics 9(1): 3-18.

Baufays, P. and J. P. Rasson (1985). "Variance changes in autoregressive models."

Time Series Analysis: Theory and Practice. North-Holland, New York: 119–127.

Bekaert, G. and R. H. Campbell (1997). "What matters for emerging market

investment." Emerging markets 1: 17-46.

Bennett, P. and J. Kelleher (1988). "The international transmission of stock prices

disruption in October 1987." Quarterly Review(Sum): 17-33.

Black, F. (1972). "Capital market equilibrium with restricted borrowing." Journal of

business: 444-455.

Black, F. (1972). "Capital market equilibrium with restricted borrowing." Journal of

business 45(3): 444-455.

Black, F., M. C. Jensen and M. Scholes (1972). "The capital asset pricing model:

Some empirical tests." Studies in the theory of capital markets 81: 79–121.

Blume, M. E. (1970). "Portfolio theory: a step toward its practical application."

Journal of Business: 152-173.

Page 194: Phd Thesis

178

Blume, M. E. and I. Friend (1973). "A new look at the capital asset pricing model."

Journal of finance 28(1): 19-33.

Booth, N. B. and A. F. M. Smith (1992). "A Bayesian Approach to Retrospective

Identification of Change-points." Journal of Ecomometrics 19(4): 7-22.

Bossaerts, P., L. Fine and J. Ledyard (2002). "Inducing liquidity in thin financial

markets through combined-value trading mechanisms." European Economic Review

46(9): 1671-1695.

Brock, W. A. (2001). "Asset prices in a production economy." Growth theory,

nonlinear dynamics, and economic modelling: scientific essays of William Allen

Brock: 85.

Brown, P. and B. Donald (1983). "Stock return seasonality and the tax-loss selling

hypothesis: Analysis of the arguments and Australian evidence." Journal of Financial

Economics 12(1): 105-127.

Carhart, M. M. (1997). "On persistence in mutual fund performance." Journal of

finance 52(1): 57-82.

Chan, N. and D. A. Hsieh (1985). "An exploratory investigation of the firm size

effect." Journal of Financial Economics 14(3): 451-471.

Chang, W. W., D. Hamberg and J. Hirata (1983). "Liquidity Preference as Behavior

toward Risk is a Demand for Short-Term Securities--Not Money." The American

Economic Review 73(3): 420-427.

Charitou, A. and E. Constantinidis (2004). "Size and Book-to-Market Factors in

Earnings and Stock Returns: Empirical Evidence for Japan." Illinois International

Accounting Summer Conferences Working Paper.

Chen, H. Y. (1967). "Valuation under uncertainty." Journal of Financial and

Quantitative Analysis 2(03): 313-325.

Chen, N. F., R. Roll and S. A. Ross (1986). "Economic forces and the stock market."

Journal of Business 59(3).

Cohen, K. J., S. F. Maier, R. A. Schwartz and D. K. Whitcomb (1986). The

microstructure of securities markets, Prentice-Hall Englewood Cliffs, NJ.

Conrad, J. and G. Kaul (1998). "An anatomy of trading strategies." Review of

Financial Studies 11(3): 489.

Cooper, R. and J. Ejarque (2001). Exhuming Q: Market power vs. capital market

imperfections, National Bureau of Economic Research Cambridge, Mass., USA.

Page 195: Phd Thesis

179

Davis, W. (1997). "Do CAPM results hold in a dynamic economy A numerical

analysis." Journal of Economic Dynamics & Control, 21(6): 981-1003.

Dayong , Z., D. David and B. Marco (2005). Volatility Switching in Shanghai Stock

Exchange:

Does regulation help reduce volatility? Edgbaston, Birmingham, UK.

Dimson, E. (1979). "Risk measurement when shares are subject to infrequent trading."

Journal of Financial Economics 7(2): 197-226.

Dittmar, R. F. (2002). "Nonlinear pricing kernels, kurtosis preference, and evidence

from the cross section of equity returns." The Journal of Finance 57(1): 369-403.

Douglas, G. W. (1969). "Risk in the Equity Markets: An Empirical

Appraisal of Market Efficiency,. Yale Economic

Essays. 9: 3-45.

Drew, M. E., T. Naughton and M. Veeraraghavan (2003). "Firm size, book-to-market

equity and security returns: Evidence from the Shanghai Stock Exchange." Australian

Journal of Management 28(2): 119.

Engle, R. F. (1982). "Autoregressive conditional heteroscedasticity with estimates of

the variance of United Kingdom inflation." Econometrica 50(4): 987-1007.

Fama, E. F. (1968). "Risk, return and equilibrium: some clarifying comments."

Journal of Finance 23(1): 29-40.

Fama, E. F. and K. French (1993). "Common risk factors in the returns on stocks and

bonds." Journal of Financial Economics, 33(1): 3-56.

Fama, E. F. and K. R. French (1989). "Business conditions and expected returns on

stocks and bonds." Journal of Financial Economics 25(1): 23-49.

Fama, E. F. and K. R. French (1992). "The cross-section of expected stock returns."

Journal of finance 47(2): 427-465.

Fama, E. F. and K. R. French (1995). "Size and book-to-market factors in earnings

and returns." Journal of Finance 50(1): 131-155.

Fama, E. F. and K. R. French (1996). "Multifactor explanations of asset pricing

anomalies." Journal of Finance 51(1): 55-84.

Fama, E. F. and J. D. MacBeth (1973). "Risk, return, and equilibrium: Empirical

tests." Journal of political economy 81(3): 607-636.

Fama , E. F. and J. D. MacBeth (1974). "Tests of the Multiperiod Two-parameter

Model." Journal of financial Economics 1(1): 43-66.

Page 196: Phd Thesis

180

Feldstein, M. S. (1969). "Mean-variance analysis in the theory of liquidity preference

and portfolio selection." The Review of Economic Studies 36(1): 5-12.

Ferson, W. E. and C. R. Harvey (1993). "The risk and predictability of international

equity returns." Review of Financial Studies 6(3): 527.

Fisher, I. (1930). Theory of interest, Macmillan, New York.

Fuller, R. J. and C. C. Hsia (1984). "A simplified common stock valuation model."

Financial Analysts Journal 40(5): 49-56.

Galbraith, J. K. (2009). The great crash 1929, Mariner Books.

Gonzalez, F. (2001). "CAPM performance in the Caracas Stock Exchange from 1992

to 1998." International Review of Financial Analysis 10(3): 333-341.

Gordon, M. J. (1959). "Dividends, earnings, and stock prices." The Review of

Economics and Statistics 41(2): 99-105.

Graham, B. and D. Dodd (1934). Security analysis: principles and technique, McGraw

Hill Professional.

Graham, B. and D. Dodd (1940). Security Analysis: The Classic 1940 Edition,

McGraw-Hill Professional.

Graham, J. R. and C. R. Harvey (2001). "The theory and practice of corporate finance:

evidence from the field." Journal of financial economics 60(2-3): 187-243.

Groenewold and N. P. Fraser (1997). "Share prices and macroeconomic factors."

Journal of Business Finance & Accounting 24(9&10): 1367-1383.

Groenewold, N. and P. Fraser (1999). "Time-varying estimates of CAPM betas."

Mathematics and Computers in Simulation 48(4-6): 531-539.

Gultekin, M. N. and N. B. Gultekin (1983). "Stock market seasonality: international

evidence." Journal of Financial Economics 12(4): 469-481.

Guneratne, B. W. M. (2001). "January effect and monthly seasonality of emerging

stock markets: Some empirical evidence from Sri Lanka." Sri Lankan Journal of

Management 6: 186-197.

Harvey, C. R. and A. Siddique (2000). "Conditional skewness in asset pricing tests."

The Journal of Finance 55(3): 1263-1295.

Hayes, D. A. (1950). "Common Stocks and" Safety of Principal"." Journal of Finance

5(4): 387-399.

Page 197: Phd Thesis

181

Henry, O. T. (2009). "Regime switching in the relationship between equity returns

and short-term interest rates in the UK." Journal of Banking & Finance 33(2): 405-

414.

Henry, Ó. T., N. Olekalns and R. Lakshman (2007). "Identifying Interdependencies

Between South-East Asian Stock Markets: A Non-linear Approach." Australian

Economic Papers 46(2): 122-135.

Henry, O. T., N. Olekalns and K. Shields (2004). "Time Variation and Asymmetry in

the World Price of Covariance Risk: The Implications for International

Diversification." Department of Economics-Working Papers Series.

Hinkley, D. V. (1971). "Inference About Change point from Cumulative Sum of

Test." Biometrika 58: 509-523.

Hirshleifer, J. (1961). "The Bayesian Approach to Statistical Decision An

Exposition." Journal of Business 34(4): 471-489.

HO-Chan and Huang (2000). "Tests of regime switching CAPM under price limits."

International Review of Economics & Finance 12(3): 305-326.

Hsu, D. A. (1977). "Tests for variance shift at an unknown time point." Applied

Statistics 26(3): 279-284.

Hsu, D. A. (1979). "Detecting shifts of parameter in gamma sequences with

applications to stock price and air traffic flow analysis." Journal of the American

Statistical Association 74(365): 31-40.

Hsu, D. A. (1982). "A Bayesian robust detection of shift in the risk structure of stock

market returns." Journal of the American Statistical Association 77(377): 29-39.

Hsu, D. A., R. B. Miller and D. W. Wichern (1974). "On the stable Paretian behavior

of stock-market prices." Journal of the American Statistical Association 69(345): 108-

113.

Huang, H. C. R. (2003). "Tests of regime-switching CAPM under price limits."

International Review of Economics & Finance 12(3): 305-326.

Inclan, C. and G. C. Tiao (1994). "Use of Cumulative Sums of Squares for

Retrospective Detection of Changes of Variance." Journal of the American Statistical

Association 89(427).

Jagannathan, R. and Z. Wang (1996). "The conditional CAPM and the cross-section

of expected returns." Journal of Finance 51(1): 3-53.

Page 198: Phd Thesis

182

Jegadeesh, N. and S. Titman (1993). "Returns to buying winners and selling losers:

Implications for stock market efficiency." Journal of finance 48(1): 65-91.

Jegadeesh, N. and S. Titman (2001). "Profitability of momentum strategies: An

evaluation of alternative explanations." The Journal of Finance 56(2): 699-720.

Kandel, Shmuel, F. Robert and Stambaugh (1995). "Portfolio ineffciency and the

cross-section of expected returns." Journal of Finance 50(1): 157-184.

Kargin, V. (2002). "Value investing in emerging markets: risks and benefits."

Emerging markets review 3(3): 233-244.

Keim, D. (1983). "Size-related Anomalies and Stock Return Seasonality: Further

Empirical Evidence." Journal of Financial Economics 12(1): 13-32.

Keim, D. B. (1983). "Size-related anomalies and stock return seasonality:: Further

empirical evidence." Journal of Financial Economics 12(1): 13-32.

Keynes, J. M. (1937). "The" Ex-Ante" Theory of the Rate of Interest." The Economic

Journal 47(188): 663-669.

Kothari, S. P., J. Shanken and R. G. Sloan (1995). "Another look at the cross-section

of expected stock returns." Journal of Finance 50(1): 185-224.

La Porta, R. (1996). "Expectations and the cross-section of stock returns." Journal of

Finance 51(5): 1715-1742.

Lakonishok, J., A. Shleifer and R. W. Vishny (1994). "Contrarian investment,

extrapolation, and risk." Journal of Finance 49: 1541-1578.

Lakonishok, J. and S. Smidt (1984). "Volume and turn-of-the-year behavior." Journal

of Financial Economics 13(3): 435-455.

Lettau, M. and S. Ludvigson (2001). "Resurrecting the (C) CAPM: A cross sectional

test when risk premia are time varying." Journal of Political Economy 109(6).

Lintner, J. (1965). "The valuation of risk assets and the selection of risky investments

in stock portfolios and capital budgets." Review of Economics and Statistics 47: 13-

37.

Lintner, J. (1965). "The valuation of risk assets and the selection of risky investments

in stock portfolios and capital budgets." The Review of Economics and Statistics

47(1): 13-37.

Longin, F. and B. Solnik (2001). "Extreme correlation of international equity

markets." The Journal of Finance 56(2): 649-676.

Page 199: Phd Thesis

183

MacKinlay, A. C. (1995). "Multifactor models do not explain deviations from the

CAPM." Journal of Financial Economics 38(1): 3-28.

Masson, P. (1999). "Contagion: monsoonal effects, spillovers and jumps between

multiple equilibria", in (ed), The Asian financial crisis: causes, contagion and

consequences, Cambridge Univ Press: 265.

Menzefricke, U. (1981). "A Bayesian analysis of a change in the precision of a

sequence of independent normal random variables at an unknown time point."

Applied Statistics 30(2): 141-146.

Miller, M. and M. Scholes (1972). "Rate of return in relation to risk: A reexamination

of some recent findings." Studies in the theory of capital markets: 47-78.

Mishkin, F. S. (1998). International experiences with different monetary policy

regimes. Seminar Papers, Stockholm University, Institute for International Economic

Studies.

Mishkin, F. S. and K. Schmidt-Hebbel (2001). "One decade of inflation targeting in

the world: what do we know and what do we need to know?" NBER working paper.

Mitchell, M. and J. Netter (1989). "Triggering the 1987 stock market crash:

Antitakeover provisions in the proposed house ways and means tax bill?" Journal of

Financial Economics 24(1): 37-68.

Mossin, J. (1966). "Equilibrium in a capital asset market." Econometrica: Journal of

the Econometric Society 34(4): 768-783.

Neumark, D., P. A. Tinsley and S. Tosini (1991). "After-hours stock prices and post-

crash hangovers." Journal of Finance 46(1): 159-178.

Nicolaas, G. (1999). "Time-varying estimates of CAPM betas." Mathematics and

Computers in simulation 48: 531-539.

Nimal, P. D. (1997). "Relationship Between Stock Returns and Selected Fundamental

Variables: Evidence from Sri Lanka." Sri Lankan Journal of Management 2(3): 268-

287.

Palma, G. (1998). "Three and a half cycles of'mania, panic, and [asymmetric] crash':

East Asia and Latin America compared." Cambridge Journal of Economics 22(6):

789.

Reinganum, M. R. (1982). "A direct test of Roll's conjecture on the firm size effect."

Journal of Finance 37(1): 27-35.

Page 200: Phd Thesis

184

Reinganum, M. R. (1983). "The anomalous stock market behavior of small firms in

January: Empirical tests for tax-loss selling effects." Journal of Financial Economics

12(1): 89-104.

Roll, R. (1977). "A critique of the asset pricing theory's tests Part I: On past and

potential testability of the theory." Journal of financial economics 4(2): 129-176.

Roll, R. (1983). "The Turn of the Year Effect and the Return Premia of Small firms."

Journal of Portfolio Management 9: 18-28.

Roll, R. (1989). "Price volatility, international market links, and their implications for

regulatory policies." Journal of Financial Services Research 3(2): 211-246.

Rozeff, M. and W. Kinney (1976). "Capital Market Seasonality: The Case of Stock

Market Returns." Journal of Financial Economics 3(4): 379-402.

Salomons, R. and H. Grootveld (2003). "The equity risk premium: emerging vs.

developed markets." Emerging Markets Review 4(2): 121-144.

Samarakoon, L. P. (1997). "The Cross-section of Expected Stock Returns in Sri

Lanka." Sri Lankan Journal of Management 2(3): 234-250.

Scholes, M. and J. Williams (1977). "Estimating betas from nonsynchronous data."

Journal of Financial Economics 5(3): 309-327.

Seyhun, H. N. (1990). "Overreaction or fundamentals: Some lessons from insiders'

response to the market crash of 1987." Journal of Finance 45(5): 1363-1388.

Sharpe, W. (1964). "Capital Asset Pricing Theory of Market Equibrilium under

conditions of risk." Journal of Finance 19(3): 425-442.

Sharpe, W. F. (1964). "Capital asset prices: A theory of market equilibrium under

conditions of risk." Journal of finance 19(3): 425-442.

Sharpe, W. F. (1998). "The sharpe ratio." Streetwise: the best of the Journal of

portfolio management: 169.

Simpson, M. W. and S. Ramchander (2008). "An inquiry into the economic

fundamentals of the Fama and French equity factors." Journal of Empirical Finance

15(5): 801-815.

Smith, A. F. M. (1975). "A Bayesian approach to inference about a change-point in a

sequence of random variables." Biometrika 62(2): 407-416.

Solnik, B. H. (1974). "An equilibrium model of the international capital market."

Journal of economic theory 8(4): 500-524.

Page 201: Phd Thesis

185

Strong, N. and X. G. Xu (1997). " Explaining the Cross -section of UK Expected

Stock Returns." The British Accounting Review 29(1): 1-23.

Susmel, R. (1997). "Switching Volatility in Latin American Emerging Equity

Markets." Working Paper.

Tobin, J. (1958). "Liquidity preference as behavior towards risk." The Review of

Economic Studies 25(2): 65-86.

Tsay, R. S. (1988). "Outliers, level shifts, and variance changes in time series."

Journal of forecasting 7(1): 1-20.

Van Norden, S. (1996). "Regime switching as a test for exchange rate bubbles."

Journal of Applied Econometrics 11(3): 219-251.

Wachtel, S. B. (1942). "Certain observations on seasonal movements in stock prices."

Journal of Business of the University of Chicago 15(2): 184-193.

Wai, C. S. and Y. N. T. Gordon (2005). "Common risk factors in returns in Asian

emerging stock markets." International Business Review 14: 695-717.

Wilson, J. W. and C. P. Jones (1990). "Is There a January Effect in Corporate Bond

and Paper Returns?" Financial Review 25(1): 55-79.

Worsley, K. J. (1986). "Confidence regions and tests for a change-point in a sequence

of exponential family random variables." Biometrika 73(1): 91.

Page 202: Phd Thesis

186

Appendix A: The companies in the CSE

New Listing and De-Listing of Companies 1999-2008

year Name of newly listed Companies Name of the De-Listed Companies

1999 Nations Trust Bank Ltd, Metropolitan

Resource Holdings Ltd, Ruhunu Hotels &

Travels Ltd, Namunukula Plantations Ltd

Carsons Marketing Ltd

Champs Developments Ltd

Electro Holiday Resorts Ltd

Ceylon Nutritional Foods Ltd

Siedles T.V. Indusry Ltd

Forbes Ceylon Ltd

Aitken Spence Hotels Ltd

2000 Asian Alliance Insurance Co Ltd, Talawakelle

Plantations Ltd, Malwatte Plantations Ltd,

Elpitiya Plantations Ltd

Lady Havelock Gardens Company Ltd

Elastomeric Engineering Company Ltd

Associated Rubber Products Ltd

2001 Watapota Investment Limited

Habarana Walk Inn Ltd

Walkers Tours Ltd

Ceylon Synthetic Textile Mills Ltd

2002 E-Channeling Ltd,

Touchwood Investment Ltd, Tess Agro Ltd

Collettes Ltd

Mikechris Industries Ltd

Korea Ceylon Footwear Manufacturing

Company Ltd

Kandy Textile Industries Ltd

Hayleys Photoprint Ltd

Haytech Marketing Ltd

Reckitt Benckiser (Lanka) Ltd

Coca-Cola Beverages (Sri Lanka) Ltd

Ocean View Ltd

2003 The Lanka Hospitals Corp. Ltd, Ceylon

Leather Products Ltd, Ceylon Hospitals Ltd,

Hemas Holdings Ltd.

Ceylon Strategic Holdings Ltd

2004 1) Nawaloka Hospitals Limited

2) Lanka IOC Ltd.

Asian Hotels Corporation Ltd, Metalix

Engineering Co. Ltd, Pugoda Textile Mills

Ltd, Veyangoda Textile Mills Ltd, Metal

Recyclers Colombo Ltd, Upali Enterprises

Ltd.

Page 203: Phd Thesis

187

year Name of newly listed Companies Name of the De-Listed Companies

2005 Dialog Telekom Limited

Sierra Cables Limited

W.M.Mendis & Company Limited

Ceylon Holiday Resorts Limited

Habarana Lodge Limited

International Tourists & Hoteliers Ltd

Kandy Walk Inn Limited

Lake House Investments Limited

Bata Shoe Company of Ceylon Limited

Glaxo Wellcome Ceylon Limited

NDB Bank Limited

2006 Vallibel Power Erathna Ltd

Mercantile Leasing Ltd.

Lakdhanavi Ltd.

Metal Packaging Ltd.

Statcon Ltd.

2007 Samuel Sons &Company Ltd.

Ceylon Oxygen Ltd.

2008 Janashakthi Insurance Company PLC

Ceylinco Insurance PLC (Non Voting )

Millers

Associated Hotels PLC.

Source: CD of Data Library CSE.

Page 204: Phd Thesis

188

Appendix B: Classification of Sectors of the CSE

Bank Finance and Insurance 33

Land and Property 21

Beverage Food Tobacco 18

Manufacturing 32

Chemical Pharms 9

Motors 7

Construction and Engineering 4

Oil Palms 5

Diversified 10

Plantations 18

Footwear Textile 4

Power and Energy 18

Health Care 6

Services 7

Hotel Travels 33

Storces Supplies 6

IT 1

Telecommunications 2

Investment Trust 6

Trading 11

Source: Colombo Stock Exchange

Page 205: Phd Thesis

189

Appendix C: VB codes

Codes for Matching BE and ME values for all companies

Dim moApp As Excel.Application ' Excel File with New data

Dim moWB As Excel.Workbook

Dim mows As Excel.Worksheet

Dim DataMat(250, 7) As String 'create new 2D array

Dim xlApp As Excel.Application ' Excel file with Original data

Dim wb As Workbook

Dim ws As Worksheet

Private Sub Command1_Click()

'Load existing Excel file

Set xlApp = New Excel.Application

Set wb = xlApp.Workbooks.Open("D:\Sabaragamuwa-dean\SmallBig

portfolio.xls")

Set ws = wb.Worksheets(cmbYear.Text)

xlApp.Visible = True

ws.Activate

End Sub

Private Sub Command2_Click()

'Create New Excel File

Set mows = moWB.Worksheets.Add

mows.Name = cmbYear.Text

mows.Cells(1, 1).Value = "Company ID"

mows.Cells(1, 2).Value = "Company Name in Short"

mows.Cells(1, 3).Value = "Company Code1"

mows.Cells(1, 4).Value = "Price"

mows.Cells(1, 5).Value = "Company Name in Long"

mows.Cells(1, 6).Value = "Company Code2"

mows.Cells(1, 7).Value = "BEPS"

'Read existing Excel sheet and write to new sheet

For i = 1 To 250

If ws.Cells(i, 1) = "Big Portfolios" Then

i = i + 2

For j = 2 To 250

If (ws.Cells(i, 3) <> "") And (ws.Cells(i, 3) = ws.Cells(j, 6)) Then

For k = 0 To 3

Page 206: Phd Thesis

190

p = i - 2

If k < 4 Then

DataMat(p, k) = ws.Cells(i, (k + 1))

End If

mows.Cells(i, (k + 1)).Value = DataMat(p, k)

Next

For k = 4 To 5

p = i - 2

If k < 6 Then

DataMat(p, k) = ws.Cells(j, k + 2)

End If

mows.Cells(i, (k + 2)).Value = DataMat(p, k)

Next

End If

Next j

Else

For j = 2 To 250

If (ws.Cells(i, 3) <> "") And (ws.Cells(i, 3) = ws.Cells(j, 6)) Then

For k = 0 To 3

p = i - 2

If k < 4 Then

DataMat(p, k) = ws.Cells(i, (k + 1))

End If

mows.Cells(i, (k + 1)).Value = DataMat(p, k)

Next

For k = 3 To 5

p = i - 2

If k < 6 Then

DataMat(p, k) = ws.Cells(j, k + 2)

End If

mows.Cells(i, (k + 2)).Value = DataMat(p, k)

Next

End If

Next j

Page 207: Phd Thesis

191

End If

Next i

moApp.Visible = True

MsgBox ("Year " & cmbYear.Text & " completed")

wb.Close

xlApp.Application.Quit

Set wb = Nothing

Set xlApp = Nothing

End Sub

Private Sub Form_Load()

Set moApp = New Excel.Application

Set moWB = moApp.Workbooks.Add

End Sub